巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Samudīraṇa: {'def': '【中】说话，运动。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+udīraṇa in meaning udīreti1),【中】移动(moving)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+udīraṇa in meaning udīreti 1] moving M.I,119; D.I,76; Vism.365; DhsA.307. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudīreti: {'def': '(saŋ + u + īr + e), 发出，移动。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dīrita。【独】 ~retvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+īr+e), 发出，移动。【过】samudīresi。【过分】samudīrita。【独】samudīretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samudīrita: {'def': '[saṁ+udīrita] uttered J.VI,17. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samugga: {'def': '【阳】首饰盒。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Class. Sk. samudga] a box, basket J.I,265, 372, 383; Miln.153, 247; Sdhp.360 (read samuggābhaṁ). Samugga-jātaka the 436th Jātaka J.III,527 sq. (called Karaṇḍaka-Jātaka ibid.; V,455). (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】首饰盒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samuggacchati: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+gam去+a), 出现，得存在。【过】samuggacchi。【独】samuggantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + gam + a), 出现，得存在。【过】 ~chi。【独】~ggantvā。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samuggahīta: {'def': '[pp. of samuggaṇhāti] seized, taken up Sn.352, 785, 801, 837, 907; Nd¹ 76, 100, 193. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuggama: {'def': '【阳】升，起源。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uggama] rise, origin VbhA.21 (twofold, of the khandhas). (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】升，起源。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samuggata: {'def': '(Samuggacchati的【过分】) 出现，得存在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uggata] arisen VvA.280; J.IV,403 (text samuggagata). (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuggaṇhāti: {'def': '[saṁ+uggaṇhati] to seize, grasp, embrace; ger. samuggahāya Sn.797; Nd¹ 105. -- pp. samuggahīta. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + gah + ṇhā), 了解得好。【过】 ~gaṇhi。【过分】~gahita。【独】 ~hetvā。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+gah拿+ṇhā), 了解得好。【过】samuggaṇhi。【过分】samuggaṇhita。【独】samuggaṇhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samugghāta: {'def': '【阳】推挤，撞，连根拔起，移掉。 ~taka, 【形】废止，除去。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ugghāta; BSk. samudghāṭa Lal. Vist. 36, 571] uprooting, abolishing, removal D.I,135; M.I,136; A.II,34; III,407; V,198; S.II,263; III,131; IV,31; Vin.I,107, 110; J.III,397. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】推挤，撞，连根拔起，断绝。samugghātaka,【形】废止，除去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samugghātaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] removing Miln.278. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samugghāteti: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+ghāt+e), 废止，连根拔起，除去。【过】samugghātesi。【过分】samugghātita。【独】samugghātetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + ghāt + e), 废止，连根拔起，除去。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~tita。【独】 ~tetvā。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samugghātita: {'def': '[pp. of samugghāteti, see samūhanati] abolished, completely removed; nt. abstr. °tta Miln.101. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuggirati: {'def': '(saŋ + u + gir + a), 发出，丢出，散发。【过】 ~giri。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+u+gir +a), 发出，丢出，散发。【过】samuggiri。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uggirati] to throw out, eject VvA.199; to cry aloud Dāvs.V,29. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuggiraṇa: {'def': '【中】说话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】说话。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samujjala: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+ujjala] resplendent J.I,89, 92 (pañcavaṇṇa-vattha°). raṁsi-jāla° resplendent with the blaze of rays VvA.12, 14, 166. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】辉煌的，光亮的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】辉煌的，光亮的。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samujjhita: {'def': '【形】丢弃的，抛弃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】丢弃的，抛弃的。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samujju: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+uju] straightforward, perfect Sn.352; S.IV,196 (text saṁmuju). (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samukkaŋseti: {'def': '(saŋ + u + ka + e), 颂杨，称赞。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】 ~setvā。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samukkaṁsati: {'def': '[saṁ+ukkaṁsati] to extol, to praise Sn.132, 438; M.I,498. -- pp. samukkaṭṭha. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samukkaṁseti: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+ka+e), 颂扬，称赞。【过】samukkaṁesi。【过分】samukkaṁsita。【独】samukkaṁsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samukkaṭṭha: {'def': '[saṁ+ukkaṭṭha] exalted A.IV,293; Th.1, 632. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samukkheṭita: {'def': '[saṁ+ukkheṭita] despised, rejected Vin.III,95; IV,27. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samukkācanā: {'def': '=ukkācanā Vbh.352; Vism.23. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samullapana: {'def': '【中】 samullāpa, 【阳】交谈。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】samullāpa,【阳】交谈。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+ullapana] talking (with), conversation SnA 71. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samullapati: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+lap唠叨+a), 友善地交谈。【过】samullapi。【过分】samullapita。【独】samulpitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ullapati] to talk, converse Vin.III,187; PvA.237; ppr. samullapanto J.III,49. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + lap + a), 友善地交谈。【过】 ~lapi。【过分】 ~lapita。【独】 ~pitvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samullāpa: {'def': '[=last] conversation, talk Miln.351. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samunna: {'def': '[saṁ+unna] moistened, wet, immersed S.IV,158; cp. the similar passage A.II,211 with ref. to taṇhā as a snare (pariyonaddha). (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+unna),湿润、湿(moistened, wet)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samunnameti: {'def': '[saṁ+unnameti] to raise, elevate, Th.1, 29. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupabbūḷha: {'def': '[saṁ+upa+viyūḷha] set up; heaped, massed, in full swing (of a battle), crowded M.I,253; D.II,285; S.I,98; Miln.292; J.I,89. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'samupabyūḷha,【形】群集的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】全力进行的，拥挤的。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samupagacchati: {'def': '(saŋ + upa + gam + a), 接近。【过】 ~cchi。【过分】~pagata。【独】 ~gantvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+upagacchati] to approach Miln.209. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+upa近+gam去+a), 接近。【过】samupagacchi。【过分】samupagata。【独】samupagantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samupagamana: {'def': '【中】接近。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】接近。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samupagamma: {'def': '【独】接近了。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【独】接近了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samupajaneti: {'def': '[saṁ+upa+janeti] to produce; °janiyamāna (ppr. pass.) Nett 195. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupama: {'def': '[saṁ+upama] resembling Mhvs 37, 68; also samūpama J.I,146; V,155; VI,534. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuparūḷha: {'def': '[saṁ+uparūḷha] ascended Dāvs.IV,42. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupasobhita: {'def': '【形】装饰的，赋予的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+upasobhita] adorned Miln.2. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】装饰的，赋予的。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samupaṭṭhahati: {'def': '[saṁ+upaṭṭhahati] to serve, help; pres. samupaṭṭhāti Sdhp.283; aor. samupaṭṭhahi Mhvs 33, 95. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupeta: {'def': '[saṁ+upeta] endowed with, Miln.352. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已赋予。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已一起赋予。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samuppajjati: {'def': '(saŋ + u + pad + ya), 出现，被生产。【过】 ~jji。【独】 ~jitvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uppajjati] to arise, to be produced S.IV,218; pp. samuppanna. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+pad去+ya), 出现，被生产。【过】samuppajji。【独】samuppajjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samuppanna: {'def': '(samuppajjati的【过分】) 出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uppanna] arisen, produced, come about Sn.168, 599; Dhs.1035. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuppatti: {'def': '(f.) origin, arising S.IV,218. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupphosita: {'def': '[saṁ+ud+phosita] sprinkled J.VI,481. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuppilava: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁ+uppilavati] jumping or bubbling up Sn.670 (°āso Nom. pl.). (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuppāda: {'def': '[saṁ+uppāda] origin, arising, genesis, coming to be, production Vin.II,96; S.III,16 sq.; It.17; A.III,406 (dhamma°); J.VI,223 (anilūpana-samuppāda, v. read, °-samuppāta, “swift as the wind”); Vism.521 (sammā & saha uppajjati=samuppāda). Cp. paṭicca°. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupādika: {'def': 'being on a level with the water Miln.237 (Trenckner conjectures samupodika). The better reading, however, is samupp°, sama=peace, quiet, thus “producing quiet,” calm. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupāgacchati: {'def': '[saṁ+upāgacchati] to come to; aor. samupāgami Mhvs 36, 91; pp. samupāgata. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samupāgata: {'def': '[saṁ+upāgata] come to, arrived at Mhvs 37, 115; 38, 12; J.VI,282; Sdhp.324. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】向…接近的。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】向…接近的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samussaya: {'def': '【阳】身体，积聚。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】身体，积聚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ud+śri, cp. BSk. samucchraya “body,” Divy 70=AvŚ I.162] 1. accumulation, complex A.II,42= It.48; It.34; bhassasamuccaya, grandiloquence Sn.245; --2. complex form, the body D.II,157=S.I,148; Vv35¹² (=sarīra VvA.164); Dh.351; Th.1, 202 (“confluence,” i. e. of the 5 factors, trslⁿ); Th.2, 22, 270; DhA.IV,70; ThA.98, 212; rūpasamussaya the same Th.2, 102; cp. samuccaya. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samusseti: {'def': '[saṁ+ud+śri] to raise, lift up, Pot. samusseyya A.I,199 (here=to be grandiloquent). -- pp. samussita. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samussita: {'def': '【过分】已抬高，已升高，已升起，已傲慢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ussita] 1. elevated, erected J.III,497. ‹-› 2. arrogant, proud, haughty Dh.147 (interpreted at DhA.III,109 as “compounded,” i. e. the body made up of 300 bones); A.I,199; SnA 288 (°ṁ bhassaṁ high and mighty talk). (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已抬高，已升高，已升起，已傲慢。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samussāheti: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+sah胜过+e), 教唆。【过】samussāhesi。【过分】samussāhita。【独】samussāhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + sah + e), 教唆。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~hita。【独】~hetvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samussāhita: {'def': '[saṁ+ussāhita] instigated VvA.105. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samussāpeti: {'def': '(saŋ + us + āpe), 升起，吊起。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+us +āpe), 升起，吊起。【过】samussāpesi。【过分】samussāpita。【独】samussāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samussāpita: {'def': '[saṁ+ussāpita] lifted, raised J.III,408. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuttarati: {'def': '(saŋ + u + tar + a), 忽略，省略。【过】 ~tari。【过分】samuttiṇṇa。【独】 ~taritvā。【动名】 ~taraṇa。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+tar+a), 忽略，省略。【过】samuttari。【过分】samuttiṇṇa。【独】samuttaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uttarati] to pass over Miln.372. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuttejaka: {'def': '【形】教唆的，煽动的。 ~jana, 【中】煽动。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】教唆的，煽动的。samuttejana,【中】煽动(instigation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samuttejeti] instigating, inciting, gladdening M.I,146; A.II,97; IV,296, 328; V,155; S.V,162; It.107. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuttejeti: {'def': '[saṁ+ud+tij] to excite, gladden, to fill with enthusiasm Vin.I,18; D.I,126. Cp. BSk. samuttejayati, e. g. Divy 80. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+tij (梵tij)使锐利﹑使敏锐+e﹐cp.BSk.samuttejayati), 使兴奋(to excite)，使高兴(gladden)，充满热情(to fill with enthusiasm)。【过】samuttesi。【过分】samuttejita。【独】samuttejetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + tij + e), 尖锐，教唆。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【独】 ~jetvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samuyyuta: {'def': '[saṁ+uyyuta] energetic, devoted Vv 63³³; VvA.269. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuñchaka: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+uncha+ka] only as nt. adv. °ṁ gleaning, (living) by gleaning S.I,19; J.IV,466 (°ṁ carati). (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuṭṭhahati: {'def': 'samuṭṭhāti, (saŋ + u + ṭhā + a), 起来，发起。【过】 ~ṭhahi。【过分】 ~ṭhita。【独】 ~hitvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uṭṭhahati] to rise up, to originate; pres. samuṭṭhāti Vin.V,1; aor. samuṭṭhahi Mhvs 28, 16. -- pp. samuṭṭhita. -- Caus. samuṭṭhāpeti to raise, to originate, set on foot J.I,144, 191, 318. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'samuṭṭhāti, (saṁ+u出+ṭhā +a), 起来，发起。【过】samuṭṭhahi。【过分】samuṭṭhita。【独】samuṭṭahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samuṭṭhita: {'def': '(samuṭṭhāti 的【过分】)。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(samuṭṭhāti 的【过分】) 起来，发起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of samuṭṭhahati] arisen, originated, happened, occurred J.II,196; Dhs.1035. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】发源，因素。 ~nika, 【形】起源的。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+uṭṭhāna] rising, origination, cause; as adj. (-°) arising from A.II,87; Dhs.766 sq., 981, 1175; Miln.134, 302, 304; J.I,207; IV,171; KhA 23, 31, 123; Vism.366. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+uṭṭhāna),【中】发源，因素，等起(rising, origination, cause)。samuṭṭhana-, samuṭṭhanika,【形】起源的(arising from)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samuṭṭhānika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] originating DhsA.263. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuṭṭhāpaka: {'def': '【形】引起的，产生的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】引起的，产生的。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f. °ikā) [fr. samuṭṭhāpeti] occasioning, causing DhsA.344; VvA.72. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuṭṭhāpeti: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+ṭhā+āpe), 升起，生产，开始。【过】samuṭṭhāpesi。【过分】samuṭṭhāpita。【独】samuṭṭhāpetvā。kathaṁ samuṭṭhāpesuṁ, 议论纷纷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samā: {'def': '【阴】年。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】年。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic samā] 1. a year Dh.106; Mhvs 7, 78. ‹-› 2. in agginisamā a pyre Sn.668, 670. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samācarati: {'def': '(saṁ+ā+car移动+a), 举止，行动，练习。【过】samācari。【现分】samācaranta。【独】samācaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + car + a), 举止，行动，练习。【过】 ~cari。【现分】~caranta。【独】 ~caritvā。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ācarati] to behave, act, practise M.II,113. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samācaraṇa: {'def': '【中】samācāra,【阳】操行，行为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 samācāra, 【阳】操行，行为。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samācāra: {'def': '[saṁ+ācāra] conduct, behaviour D.II,279; III,106, 217; M.II,113; A.II,200, 239; IV,82; Sn.279; Vin.II,248; III,184. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādahati: {'def': '[saṁ+ādahati¹] to put together S.I,169. jotiṁ s. to kindle a fire Vin.IV,115; cittaṁ s. to compose the mind, concentrate M.I,116; pres. samādheti Th.2, 50; pr. part. samādahaṁ S.V,312; ppr. med. samādahāna S.I,169; aor 3^rd pl. samādahaṁsu D.II,254. Pass. samādhiyati to be stayed, composed D.I,73; M.I,37; Miln.289; Caus. II. samādahāpeti Vin.IV,115. -- pp. samāhita. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+dhā(梵dhā, dadh)放置﹑忍受+a), 镇定，集合，集中，点燃(火)。【过】samādahi。【现分】samādahanta。【独】samādahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + dhā + a), 集合，集中，点燃（火）。【过】 ~dahi。【现分】 ~hanta。【独】 ~hitvā。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samādapaka: {'def': '[fr. samādapeti; cp. BSk. samādāpaka Divy 142] instructing, arousing M.I,145; A.II,97; IV,296, 328; V,155; S.V,162; Miln.373; It.107; DhA.II,129. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'samādapetu, 【阳】煽动者。 ~pana, 【中】煽动。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'samādapetu,【阳】煽动者。samādapana,【中】煽动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samādapana: {'def': '(nt.) instructing, instigating M.III,132. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādapetar: {'def': 'adviser, instigator M.I,16. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādapeti: {'def': '(saṁ+ā+dā+āpe﹐cp.BSk.samādāpayati), 教唆(to cause to take)，激励(to incite, to rouse)。【过】samādāpesi。【过分】samādāpita。【独】samādāpetvā。3p.sg.opt. samācare。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ādapeti, cp. BSk. samādāpayati Divy 51] to cause to take, to incite, rouse Pug.39, 55; Vin.I,250; III,73; DA.I,293, 300; aor. °dapesi D.II,42, 95, 206; Miln.195; Sn.695; ger. °dapetvā D.I,126; Vin.I,18; ger. samādetvā (sic) Mhvs 37, 201; ppr. pass. °dapiyamāna D.II,42. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + dā + āpe), 教唆。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samādhi: {'def': '三摩地;三昧;定;等持[PS: = saṁ-ā-dhā; saṁ =›sama:静;寂;平静;安稳;同一;平等; ā:至(up to; towards; from); dhā:放置; ]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(‹saṁ+ā+dhā承受),【阳】三摩地，三昧。samādhija,【形】定所生的。【中】定力。samādhibhāvanā,【阴】修定。samādhisaṁvattanika,【形】助长定的。samādhisambojjhaṅga,【阳】定觉支。upacārasamādhi﹐近行定(镇伏了五盖)。appanāsamādhi﹐安止定。samādhimānantarikaññaṁ(samādhi-m-ānantarikaṁ-yaṁ﹐此不间断的三摩地。KhA.181.：Samādhimānantarikaññamāhūti yañca attano pavattisamanantaraṁ niyameneva phalapadānato “ānantarikasamādhī”ti āhu. Na hi maggasamādhimhi uppanne tassa phaluppattinisedhako koci antarāyo atthi. Yathāha--“Ayañca puggalo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno assa, kappassa ca uḍḍayhanavelā assa, neva tāva kappo uḍḍayheyya, yāvāyaṁ puggalo na sotāpattiphalaṁ sacchikaroti, ayaṁ vuccati puggalo ṭhitakappī. Sabbepi maggasamaṅgino puggalā ṭhitakappino”ti (pu.pa.17).(不间断的三摩地：因为它紧接著必定产生果，称为不间断的三摩地。当已经到「道三摩地」(maggasamādhimhi= ariyamagga，预流向)，它的果没有任何障碍产生。这是依据—“这个人为了作证预流果而行道，而且应是劫的被燃烧时间，在这个人未作证预流果之前，劫不会燃烧。这个人被称为：「住劫者」。所有具足「道」(=ariyamagga)的人都是住劫者。”(Pug.17.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '定。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【阳】定，心一境。 ~ja, 【形】定生的。【中】定力。 ~bhāvanā,【阴】修定。 ~saŋvattanika, 【形】助长定的。 ~sambojjhaṅga, 【阳】定觉支。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+ā+dhā] 1. concentration; a concentrated, self-collected, intent state of mind and meditation, which, concomitant with right living, is a necessary condition to the attainment of higher wisdom and emancipation. In the Subha-suttanta of the Dīgha (D.I,209 sq.) samādhi-khandha (“section on concentration”) is the title otherwise given to the cittasampadā, which, in the ascending order of merit accruing from the life of a samaṇa (see Sāmaññaphala-suttanta, and cp. Dial. I.57 sq.) stands between the sīla-sampadā and the paññā-sampadā. In the Ambaṭṭha-sutta the corresponding terms are sīla, caraṇa, vijjā (D. I.100). Thus samādhi would comprise (a) the guarding of the senses (indriyesu gutta-dvāratā), (b) self-possession (sati-sampajañña), (c) contentment (santuṭṭhi), (d) emancipation from the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni), (e) the 4 jhānas. In the same way we find samādhi grouped as one of the sampadās at A.III,12 (sīla°, samādhi°, paññā°, vimutti°), and as samādhi-khandha (with sīla° & paññā°) at D.III,229 (+vimutti°); A.I,125; II,20; III,15; V,326; Nd¹ 21; Nd² p. 277 (s. v. sīla). It is defined as cittassa ekaggatā M.I,301; Dhs.15; DhsA.118; cp. Cpd. 89 n. 4; identified with avikkhepa Dhs.57, and with samatha Dhs.54. -- sammā° is one the constituents of the eightfold ariya-magga, e. g. D.III,277; VbhA.120 sq. -- See further D.II,123 (ariya); Vin.I,97, 104; S.I,28; Nd¹ 365; Miln.337; Vism.84 sq. (with definition), 289 (+vipassanā), 380 (°vipphārā iddhi); VbhA.91; DhA.I,427; and on term in general Heiler, Buddhistische Versenkung 104 sq. -- 2. Description & characterization of samādhi: Its four nimittas or signs are the four satipaṭṭhānas M.I,301; six conditions and six hindrances A.III,427; other hindrances M.III,158. The second jhāna is born from samādhi D.II,186; it is a condition for attaining kusalā dhammā A.I,115; Miln.38; conducive to insight A.III,19, 24 sq., 200; S.IV,80; to seeing heavenly sights etc. D.I,173; to removing mountains etc. A.III,311; removes the delusions of self A.I,132 sq.; leads to Arahantship A.II,45; the ānantarika s. Sn.226; cetosamādhi (rapture of mind) D.I,13; A.II,54; III,51; S.IV,297; citta° id. Nett 16. dhammasamādhi almost identical with samatha S.IV,350 sq. -- Two grades of samādhi distinguished, viz. upacāra-s. (preparatory concentration) and appanā-s. (attainment concentration) DA.I,217; Vism.126; Cpd. 54, 56 sq.; only the latter results in jhāna; to these a 3^rd (preliminary) grade is added as khaṇika° (momentary) at Vism.144. -- Three kinds of s. are distinguished, suññata or empty, appaṇihita or aimless, and animitta or signless A.I,299; S.IV,360; cp. IV.296; Vin.III,93; Miln.337; cp. 333 sq.; DhsA.179 sq., 222 sq., 290 sq.; see Yogāvacara’s Manual p. xxvii; samādhi (tayo samādhī) is savitakka savicāra, avitakka vicāramatta or avitakka avicāra D.III,219; Kvu 570; cp. 413; Miln.337; DhsA.179 sq.; it is fourfold chanda-, viriya-, citta-, and vīmaṁsā-samādhi D.II,213; S.V,268. -- Another fourfold division is that into hāna-bhāgiya, ṭhiti°, visesa°, nibbedha° D.III,277 (as “dhammā duppaṭivijjhā”).

--indriya the faculty of concentration A.II,149; Dhs.15. --khandha the section on s. see above 1. --ja produced by concentration D.I,74; III,13; Vism.158. --parikkhāra requisite to the attainment of samādhi: either 4 (the sammappadhānas) M.I,301; or 7: D.II,216; III,252; A.IV,40. --bala the power of concentration A.I,94; II,252; D.III,213, 253; Dhs.28. --bhāvanā cultivation, attainment of samādhi M.I,301; A.II,44 sq. (four different kinds mentioned); III,25 sq.; D.III,222; Vism.371. --saṁvattanika conducive to concentration A.II,57; S.IV,272 sq.; D.III,245; Dhs.1344. --sambojjhaṅga the s. constituent of enlightment D.III,106, 226, 252; Vism.134=VbhA.283 (with the eleven means of cultivating it). (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādhika: {'def': '(adj.) [sama+adhika] excessive, abundant D.II,151; J.II,383; IV,31. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādhiyati: {'def': 'is Passive of samādahati. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + dhā + i + ya), 被平静下来，入定。【过】 ~dhiyi。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+dhā +i+ya), 被平静下来，入定。【过】samādhiyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samādhāna: {'def': '【中】使成整体，集中。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】使成整体，集中。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+ā+dhā] putting together, fixing; concentration Vism.84 (=sammā ādhānaṁ ṭhapanaṁ) in defⁿ of samādhi as “samādhān’aṭṭhena.” (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādinna: {'def': '[pp. of samādiyati] taken up, undertaken A.II,193. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādisati: {'def': '[saṁ+ādisati] to indicate, to command D.I,211; Mhvs 38, 59. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+dis指出+a), 指出，命令。【过】samādisi。【过分】samādiṭṭha。【独】samādisitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + dis + a), 指出，命令。【过】 ~disi。【过分】samādiṭṭha。【独】 ~disitvā。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samādiyati: {'def': '(samādāti 的【被】), 承担。【过】 ~diyi。【过分】 samādinna。【独】 ~diyitvā。【现分】 ~diyanta。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(samādāti 的【被】), 承担。【过】samādiyi。【过分】samādinna。【独】samādiyitvā。【现分】samādiyanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ādiyati¹] to take with oneself, to take upon oneself, to undertake D.I,146; imper. samādiya Bu II.118=J.I,20; aor. samādiyi S.I,232; J.I,219; ger. samādiyitvā S.I,232; & samādāya having taken up, i. e. with D.I,71; Pug.58; DA.I,207; Mhvs 1, 47; having taken upon himself, conforming to D.I,163; II,74; Dh.266; Sn.792, 898, 962; samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, he adopts and trains himself in the precepts D.I,63; S.V,187; It.118; Sn.962 (cp. Nd¹ 478). -- pp. samādinna. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samādāna: {'def': '【中】拿，遵守，接受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1. taking, bringing; asamādānacāra (m.) going for alms without taking with one (the usual set of three robes) Vin.I,254. -- 2. taking upon oneself, undertaking, acquiring M.I,305 sq.; A.I,229 sq.; II,52; J.I,157, 219; Vin.IV,319; KhA 16, 142. kammasamādāna acquiring for oneself of Karma D.I,82; A.III,417; V,33; S.V,266, 304; It.58 sq., 99 sq.; VbhA.443 sq. -- 3. resolution, vow Vin.II,268; J.I,233; Miln.352. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】拿，遵守，接受。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samādāti: {'def': '(saŋ + ā + dā + a), 拿，接受。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+dā+a), 拿，接受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samādāya: {'def': '【独】接受了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【独】接受了。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāgacchati: {'def': '(saŋ + ā + gam + a), 会合，集合。【过】 ~cchi。【独】 ~gantvā,~gamma。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+āgacchati] to meet together, to assemble Bu II.171; Sn.222; to associate with, to enter with, to meet, D.II,354; Sn.834; J.II,82; to go to see Vin.I,308; to arrive, come Sn.698; aor. 1 sg. °gañchiṁ D.II,354; 3^rd °gañchi Dh.210; J.II,62; aor. 2 sg. °gamā Sn.834; ger. °gamma B II.171=J.I,26; ger. °gantvā Vin.I,308; pp. samāgata. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+gam去+a), 会合，集合。【过】samāgacchi。【独】samāgantvā, samāgamma。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāgama: {'def': '[saṁ+āgama] meeting, meeting with, intercourse A.II,51; III,31; Miln.204; cohabitation D.II,268; meeting, assembly J.II,107; Miln.349; DhA.III,443 (three: yamaka-pāṭihāriya°; dev’orohaṇa°; Gaṅgārohaṇa°). (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】碰到，集会。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】碰到，集会。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāgata: {'def': '(Samāgacchati的【过分】), 已集合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of samāgacchati] met, assembled Dh.337; Sn.222. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāhanati: {'def': '(saṁ+ā+han+a), 袭击，奏乐器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + han + a), 袭击，奏乐器。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāhata: {'def': '[saṁ+āhata] hit, struck Sn.153 (ayosaṅku°); Miln.181, 254, 304. Saṅkusamāhata name of a purgatory M.I,337. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+āhata)(Samāhanati的【过分】), 已打，已袭击(hit, struck)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāhita: {'def': '[pp. of samādahati] 1. put down, fitted J.IV,337; -- 2. collected (of mind), settled, composed, firm, attentive D.I,13; S.I,169; A.II,6 (°indriya); III,312, 343 sq.; V,3, 93 sq., 329 sq.; Sn.212, 225, 972 etc.; Dh.362; It.119; Pug.35; Vin.III,4; Miln.300; Vism.410; Nd¹ 501. -- 3. having attained S.I,48 (cp. K.S. I.321 & Miln.352). (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samādahati‘完全放置’的【过分】),【过分】已镇定，已安顿，已安定，已集中精神。古译：三摩呬多、等引(‘等’是平等，‘引’是前后的引续，引发功德)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已安顿，已安定，已集中精神。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samākaḍḍhana: {'def': '【中】拉，拖拉，招徕。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】拉，拖拉，招徕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samākaḍḍhati: {'def': '(saŋ + ā + kaḍḍh + a), 招徕，吸引，引诱。【过】 ~ḍḍhi。【独】 ~ḍhitvā。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+kaḍḍh +a), 招徕，吸引，引诱。【过】samākaḍḍhi。【独】samākaḍḍhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ākaḍḍhati] to pull along; to entice; ger. °iya Mhvs 37, 145. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samākiṇṇa: {'def': 'samākula,【形】塞满的，覆盖的，拥挤的，撒满的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'samākula, 【形】塞满的，覆盖的，拥挤的，撒满的。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ākiṇṇa] covered, filled S.I,6; Miln.342. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samākula: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+ākula] 1. filled, crowded B II.4= J.I,3; Miln.331, 342. -- 2. crowded together Vin.II,117. -- 3. confused, jumbled together J.V,302. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samālapati: {'def': '[saṁ+ālapati] to speak to, address J.I,478. At J.I,51 it seems to mean “to recover the power of speech.” (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāna: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Vedic samāna, fr. sama³] similar, equal, even, same Sn.18, 309; J.II,108. Cp. sāmañña¹. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】相等的，相同的，相似的。 ~gatika, 【形】同一的。 ~tta,【中】 ~tā, 【阴】 ~bhāva, 【阳】相同，平等。 ~ttatā, 【阴】公平，和气。 ~vassika, 【形】同辈的，年龄相同的。 ~saŋvāsaka, 【形】属于同一个宗教团体的。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [ppr. fr. as to be] 1. being, existing D.I,18, 60; J.I,218; PvA.129 (=santo), 167 (id.). -- 2. a kind of god D.II,260.

--āsanika entitled to a seat of the same height Vin.II,169. --gatika identical Tikp 35. --bhāva equanimity Sn.702. --vassika having spent the rainy season together Vin.I,168 sq. --saṁvāsa living together with equals Dh.302 (a°), cp. DhA.III,462. --saṁvāsaka belonging to the same communion Vin.I,321. --sīmā the same boundary, parish Vin.I,321; °ma belonging to the same parish Vin.II,300. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】相等的，相同的，相似的。samānagatika,【形】同一的。samānatta,【中】samānatā,【阴】samānabhāva,【阳】相同，平等。samānattatā,【阴】公平，和气，同事。samānavassika,【形】同辈的，年龄相同的。samānasaṁvāsaka,【形】同一个宗教团体的。samānasukhadukkha﹐同甘共苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samānatta: {'def': '(adj.) [samāna+attan] equanimous, of even mind A.IV,364. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samānattatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. last] equanimity, impartiality A.II,32=248; IV,219, 364; D.III,152, 190 sq., 232. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāneti: {'def': '[saṁ+āneti] 1. to bring together J.I,68. -- 2. to bring, produce J.I,433. -- 3. to put together, cp. J.I,120, 148. -- 4. to collect, enumerate J.I,429. -- 5. to calculate (the time) J.I,120, 148; aor. samānayi DA.I,275 ‹-› pp. samānīta. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + nī + a), 集合，比较，计算。【过】 ~esi。【独】 ~netvā。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+nī+a), 集合，比较，计算。【过】samānesi。【独】samānetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāniyā: {'def': '[Instr. fem. of samāna, used adverbially, Vedic samānyā] (all) equally, in common Sn.24. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samānīta: {'def': '[pp. of samāneti] brought home, settled Miln.349. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Samāneti的【过分】) 集合，比较，计算。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāpajjana: {'def': '【中】进入，通过。samāpajjnavasitā﹐入定自在，能够轻易及迅速地证入禅那，而且在达到入定的过程中并没有很多的有分心生起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】进入，通过。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. last] entering upon, passing through (?) Miln.176. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāpajjati: {'def': '(saŋ + ā + pad + ya), 着手，从事。【过】 ~pajji。【现分】~janta。 ~jamāna。【独】 ~jitvā, ~pajja。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+āpajjati] 1. to come into, enter upon, attain D.I,215 (samādhiṁ samāpajji); Vin.III,241 (Pot. °pajjeyya); samāpattiṁ J.I,77; arahattamaggaṁ A.II,42 sq.; Vin.I,32; saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ to attain the trance of cessation S.IV,293; kayavikkayaṁ to engage in buying and selling Vin.III,241; sākacchaṁ to engage in conversation D.II,109; tejodhātuṁ to convert one’s body into fire Vin.I,25; II,76. -- 2. to become S.III,86 (aor. 3^rd pl. samāpaduṁ). -- pp. samāpajjita & samāpanna. (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+pad去+ya), 著手，从事。【过】samāpajji。【现分】samāpajjanta。samāpajjamāna。【独】samāpajjitvā, samāpajja。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāpajjita: {'def': '[pp. of °āpajjati] attained, reached, got into D.II,109 (parisā °pubbā). (Page 685)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāpanna: {'def': '(samāpajjati 的【过分】)著手，从事。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of samāpajjati] having attained, got to, entered, reached S.IV,293 (saññā-nirodhaṁ); A.II,42 (arahatta-maggaṁ entered the Path); Dh.264 (icchālobha° given to desire); Kvu 572 (in special sense= attaining the samāpattis). (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samāpajjati 的【过分】)。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāpannaka: {'def': '(adj.) [last+ka] possessed of the samāpattis DA.I,119. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāpattesiya: {'def': '(adj.) [samāpatti+esiya, adj. to esikā] longing for attainment Kvu 502 sq. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāpatti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+ā+pad] attainment A.III,5; S.II,150 sq.; IV,293 (saññā-vedayita-nirodha°); Dhs.30= 101; a stage of meditation A.I,94; Dhs.1331; J.I,343, 473; PvA.61 (mahā-karuṇā°); Nd¹ 100, 106, 139, 143; the Buddha acquired anekakoṭisata-sahassā s. J.I,77. The eight attainments comprise the four Jhānas, the realm of the infinity of space, realm of the infinity of consciousness, realm of nothingness, realm of neither consciousness nor unconsciousness Ps.I,8, 20 sq.; Nd¹ 108, 328; Bu 192=J.I,28, 54; necessary for becoming a Buddha J.I,14; acquired by the Buddha J.I,66; the nine attainments, the preceding and the trance of cessation of perception and sensation S.II,216, 222; described M.I,159 sq. etc.; otherwise called anupubbavihārā D.II,156; A.IV,410, 448 & passim [cp. Divy 95 etc.]. -- In collocation with jhāna, vimokkha, and samādhi Vin.I,97; A.III,417 sq.; cp. Cpd. 59, 133 n. 3. --°bhāvanā realizing the attainments J.I,67; °kusalatā success in attainment D.III,212; Dhs.1331 sq. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+pad),【阴】达到(attainment)，入定(a stage of meditation)，三摩钵地。mātugāmena saddhiṁ dvayaṁdvayasamāpattiṁ samāpajjati(与妇女俱为双双达到三摩钵地；雌雄等至)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāpattila: {'def': '[fr. last] one who has acquired J.I,406. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāpaṭipatti: {'def': 'misprint for sammā° A.I,69. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāpeti: {'def': '(saṁ+ap+e), 总结，终结，完成。【过】samāpesi。【过分】samāpita。【独】samāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+āpeti] to complete, conclude Mhvs 5, 280; 30, 55; DA.I,307 (desanaṁ). -- pp. samatta². (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ap + e), 总结，终结，完成。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samārabhati: {'def': '(saṁ+ā+rabh+a), 开始，从事，杀。【过】samārabhi。【独】samārabhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ārabhati²] to begin, undertake M.I,227; Mhvs 5, 79. -- pp. samāraddha. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + rabh + a), 开始，从事，杀。【过】 ~rabhi。【独】~bhitvā。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāraddha: {'def': '(samārabbhati 的【过分】), 已开始。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of samārabhati] undertaken S.IV,197; Dh.293; J.II,61. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samārabbhati 的【过分】), 已开始。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāraka: {'def': '【形】包括魔天的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+māra+ka] including Māra Vin.I,11=S.V,423; D.I,250; III,76, 135 & passim. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】包括魔天的。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samārambha: {'def': '【阳】事业，活动，受伤，残杀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】事业，活动，受伤，残杀。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ārambha] 1. undertaking, effort, endeavour, activity A.II,197 sq. (kāya°, vacī°, mano°); Vin.IV,67. -- 2. injuring, killing, slaughter Sn.311; D.I,5; DA.I,77; A.II,197; S.V,470; Pug.58; DhsA.146. --appasamārambha (written °rabbha) connected with little (or no) injury (to life) D.I,143. Cp. ārabhati¹. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāropana: {'def': '【中】举起，穿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. samāropeti] one of the Hāras Nett 1, 2, 4, 108, 205 sq., 256 sq. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】举起，穿。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāropeti: {'def': '(saŋ + ā + rup + e), 使登上，穿上，信赖。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+rup+e), 使登上，穿上，信赖。【过】samāropesi。【过分】samāropita。【独】samāropetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāruhana: {'def': '【中】爬，登。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】爬，登。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāruhati: {'def': '[saṁ+āruhati] to climb up, to ascend, enter; pres. samārohati J.VI,209 (cp. samorohatī p. 206, read samārohatī); aor. samārūhi Mhvs 14, 38. -- pp. samārūḷha. -- Caus. samāropeti to raise, cause to enter Miln.85; to put down, enter Nett 4, 206. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + ruh + a), 爬上，登上。【过】 ~ruhi。【过分】 ~rūḷha。【独】 ~hitvā, samāruyha。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+ruh上升+a), 爬上，登上。【过】samāruhi。【过分】samārūḷha。【独】samāruhitvā, samāruyha。【祈】samāropeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samārūḷha: {'def': '(samāruhati 的【过分】)。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of samāruhati] ascended, entered M.I,74. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samāruhati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāsa: {'def': '【阳】混合物，删节。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+ās] 1. compound, combination Vism.82; SnA 303; KhA 228. Cp. vyāsa. -- 2. an abridgment Mhvs 37, 244. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】混合物，删节。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāsama: {'def': '“exactly the same” at Ud.85 (=D.II,135) read sama°. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāsana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+āsana] sitting together with, company Sn.977. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāsati: {'def': '[saṁ+āsati] to sit together, associate; Pot. 3 sg. samāsetha S.I,17, 56 sq.; J.II,112; V,483, 494; Th.1, 4. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāseti: {'def': '(saŋ + ās + e), 结交，联合，节略。【过】 ~sesi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】 ~setvā。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ās+e), 结交，联合，节略。【过】samāsesi。【过分】samāsita。【独】samāsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāsādeti: {'def': '[saṁ+āsādeti] to obtain, get; ger. samāsajja J.III,218. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samātapa: {'def': '[saṁ+ātapa] ardour, zeal A.III,346. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāvahati: {'def': '(saṁ+ā+vah+a) 使发生，致使。【过】samāvahi。【现分】samāvahanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + vah + a) 使发生，致使。【过】 ~vahi。【现分】~vahanta。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāvaya: {'def': '=samavāya, closely united J.VI,475 (in verse). (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samāyoga: {'def': '[saṁ+āyoga] combination, conjunction DA.I,95; Sdhp.45, 469. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】组合，联合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】组合，联合。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samāyuta: {'def': '【形】联合的，团结的。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+āyuta] combined, united Miln.274. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】联合的，团结的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samāyāti: {'def': '(saŋ + ā + yā + a), 集合，团结。【过分】 samāyāta。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ā+yā+a), 集合，团结。【过分】samāyāta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+āyāti] to come together, to be united J.III,38. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samīcī: {'def': 'D.II,94: see sāmīcī. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samīhati: {'def': '[saṁ+īhati] to move, stir; to be active; to long for, strive after Sn.1064 (cp. Nd² 651); Vv 5¹; VvA.35; J.V,388. -- pp. samīhita. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samīhita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of samīhati] endeavour, striving after, pursuit J.V,388. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samīpa: {'def': '【形】近。samīpaga,【形】接近的。samīpacārī,【形】近的。samīpaṭṭha,【形】站近的。samīpaṭṭhāna,【中】附近的地方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】近。 ~ga, 【形】接近的。 ~cārī, 【形】近的。 ~ṭṭha, 【形】站近的。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】附近的地方。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. samīpa] near, close (to) SnA 43 (bhumma-vacana), 174, 437; KhA 111; PvA.47 (dvāra° magga) (nt.) proximity D.I,118. Cases adverbially: Acc. °aṁ near to PvA.107; Loc. °-e near (with Gen.) SnA 23, 256; PvA.10, 17, 67, 120.

--ga approaching Mhvs 4, 27; 25, 74. --cara being near DhsA.193. --cārin being near D.I,206; II,139. --ṭṭha standing near Mhvs 37, 164. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samīpaka: {'def': '(adj.) [samīpa+ka] being near Mhvs 33, 52. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samīra: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+īr] air, wind Dāvs.IV,40. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samīrati: {'def': '[saṁ+īrati] to be moved Vin.I,185; Dh.81; DhA.II,149. -- pp. samīrita J.I,393. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+īr +a), 吹，移动。【过分】samīrita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + īr + a), 吹，移动。【过分】 samīrita。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samīraṇa: {'def': '【阳】风。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】风。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samīreti: {'def': '(saŋ + īr + e), 发出，说话。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】~retvā。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+īr+e), 发出，说话。【过】samīresi。【过分】samīrita。【独】samīretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samīrita: {'def': '[saṁ+īrita] stirred, moved J.I,393. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samītar: {'def': '[=sametar] one who meets, assembles; pl. samītāro J.V,324. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samūha: {'def': '【阳】多数，众多，大量，集合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】多数，大量，集合。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+vah, uh] multitude, mass, aggregation Nett 195; PvA.49, 127, 157 (=gaṇa), 200 (id.). (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samūhanati: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+han+a= saṁ+ūhanati2拉出), 连根拔起，除去(to remove)，废止(to abolish)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ūhanati²] to remove, to abolish Vin.I,110; D.I,135 sq. (°hanissati); II,91=S.V,432; M.I,47; II,193; S.V,76; J.I,374=Sn.360; Sn.14, 369, 1076; sikkhāpadaṁ Vin.III,23; D.II,154; uposathāgāraṁ to discontinue using a Vihāra as an Uposathāgāra Vin.I,107; sīmaṁ to remove the boundary Vin.I,110. Pres. also samūhanti S.III,156; Pot. samūhaneyya Vin.I,110; imper. samūhantu D.II,154; & °ūhanatu Miln.143; ger. samūhanitvā M.I,47; Vin.I,107; a° M.III,285; inf. samugghātuṁ Mhvs 37, 32; grd. samūhantabba Vin.I,107. -- Caus. II. samugghātāpeti to cause to be removed, i. e. to put to death Miln.193; samūhanāpeti Miln.142. ‹-› pp. samūhata & (Caus.) samugghātita. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + han + a), 连根拔起，废止，除去。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samūhata: {'def': '[pp. of samūhanati] taken out, removed D.I,136; S.III,131; Th.1,604; Dh.250; Sn.14, 360; It.83; J.IV,345 (Kern, wrongly, “combined”). (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Samūhanati‘连根拔起’的【过分】) 连根拔起，废止，除去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samūhatatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. samūhata] abolition M.III,151. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samūheti: {'def': '[Caus. of saṁ+uh=vah] to gather, collect Mhvs 37, 245. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samūlaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+mūla+ka] including the root Th.2 385; ThA.256. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】包括根的。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】包括根的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samūpasanta: {'def': '[saṁ+upasanta] is v. l. for su-vūpasanta (?) “calmed,” at KhA 21. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

San: {'def': '¹ [cp. Vedic śvā, Gen. śunaḥ; Av. spā, Gr. ku/wn; Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds=hound] a dog; Nom. sg. sā D.I,166=M.I,77; S.I,176; III,150; Kvu 336. For other forms of the same base see suvāṇa. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (=saṁ) Acc. of sa⁴. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanacca: {'def': '(nt.) [sa³+nacca] dancing (-party) Vin.II,267. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanantana: {'def': '【形】初期的，旧的，永恒的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [for sanātana (cp. purātana); Idg. *seno=Gr. e(/nos old; Sk. sanaḥ in old times; Av. hana old, Lat. seneo, senex (“senile”), senatus; Goth. sineigs old; Oir. sen old] primeval, of old; for ever, eternal D.II,240, 244; S.I,189 (cp. K.S. I.321: porāṇaka, santānaṁ vā paṇḍitānaṁ dhamma); DhA.I,51. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】初期的，旧的，永恒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sanati: {'def': 'see saṇati. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + a), 发出大声音。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+a), 发出大声音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sanda: {'def': '【形】厚的，密集的。【阳】流程。sandacchāya,【形】有大荫凉的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】厚的，密集的。【阳】流程。 ~cchāya, 【形】有大荫凉的。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. sāndra] 1. (adj.) thick, dense; in --°cchāya giving dense shade S.IV,194; J.I,57, 249; DA.I,209. ‹-› (2) (thick) wood, forest; in --°vihāra dwelling in the wood, life as a hermit Th.1, 688. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandahana: {'def': '(fr. saṁ+dhā),【中】结生，装配(applying, placing (an arrow) on the string)。Vism.528.︰cittaṁ…sandahanapaccupaṭṭhānaṁ(心以‘结生’为现起)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+dhā] applying, placing (an arrow) on the string Miln.352. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】装置，装配。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandahati: {'def': '(saŋ + dhā + a), 连接，联合，安装。【过】 ~dahi。【过分】 ~hita。【独】 ~hitvā。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+dhā+a), 连接，联合，安装。【过】sandahi。【过分】sandahita。【独】sandahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+dahati¹] to put together, to connect, to fit, to arrange J.IV,336; Mhvs VII.18; ppr. med. sandahamāna DhsA.113; ger. sandahitvā J.IV,336; & sandhāya lit. after putting on J.IV,258 (the arrow on to the bow); fig. with reference to, concerning M.I,503; J.I,203, 274; II,177; PvA.87, 89, 110; towards J.I,491; III,295. pp. sandhīyate [& sandhiyyate] to be put together, to be self-contained Pug.32; to be connected SnA 376, 572; to reflect upon, to resent Sn.366; to be reconciled J.II,114. -- pp. saṁhita. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandambhita: {'def': '[fr. Sk. sandarbhati] is Kern’s proposed reading for santhambhita at J.VI,207. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandamānikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. syand] a chariot Vin.III,49; IV,339; DA.I,82; KhA 50; Vism.255. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. syand)﹐【阴】战车(a chariot)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandana: {'def': '¹ (nt.) trappings D.II,188 (read sandāna?). (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp. Vedic syandana] a chariot Mhvs 21, 25; Dpvs 14, 56; Vv 642; J.IV,103; V,264; VI,22. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】流下。【阳】二轮战车。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】流下。【阳】二轮战车。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandassaka: {'def': '【阳】指示的人，教的人。 ~sana, 【中】指令，指示，指出。~ssiyamāna, 【形】被教导的，被指出的。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. sandassati, Caus. of sandissati] instructing M.I,145; A.II,97; IV,296; S.V,162; It.107; Miln.373. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】指示的人，教的人。sandassana,【中】指令，指示，指出。sandassiyamāna,【形】被教导的，被指出的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandassana: {'def': 'showing J.I,67. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandasseti: {'def': '(saṁ+dis指出+e), 指出，解释。【过】sandassesi。【过分】sandassita。【独】sandassetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + dis + e), 指出，解释。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】~setvā。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandati: {'def': ' [syand; Dhtp 149: passavane] to flow D.II,128, 129 (aor. sandittha); J.I,18; VI,534 (v. l. sikandati= siyandati?); Pv.II,10⁴ (=pavatteti PvA.143). -- Caus. sandāpeti to cause to flow Miln.122. -- pp. sanna. ‹-› Cp. vissandati & vissandaka. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sand+a), 流动。【过】sandi。【过分】sandita。【独】sanditvā。【现分】sandamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sand + a), 流动。【过】 sandi。【过分】 sandita。【独】 ~ditvā。【现分】 ~damāna。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandeha: {'def': '[saṁ+deha] 1. accumulation; the human body Dh.148. -- 2. doubt Miln.295. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】疑惑，自己的身体。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】疑惑，自己的身体。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandesa: {'def': '【阳】资讯，一封信，书面的文件。sandesahara,【阳】报信者。sandesāgāra,【中】邮局。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. sandeśa] news, message Mhvs 18, 13. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】信息，一封信，书面的文件。 ~hara, 【阳】报信者。 ~sāgāra,【中】邮局。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandhamati: {'def': '(saŋ + dham + a), 吹，扇。【过】 ~dhami。【独】 ~mitvā。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+dhamati] to blow, to fan J.I,122. ‹-› pp. sandhanta. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+dham+a), 吹，扇。【过】sandhami。【独】sandhamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandhana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+dhana] property, belongings M.II,180. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】自己的财产。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】自己的财产。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandhanta: {'def': '[pp. of sandhamati] blown, smelted (of gold) A.I,253. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhi: {'def': '(m. & f.) [fr. saṁ+dhā] 1. union, junction Miln.330 (of 2 roads); Bdhgh on S.II,270 (between 2 houses). ‹-› 2. breach, break, hole, chasm D.II,83=A.V,195; Th.1, 786; J.V,459. āloka° a window Vin.II,172; sandhiṁ chindati to make a break, to break into a house D.I,52; DA.I,159. -- 3. joint, piece, link J.II,88; Vism.277 (the 5, of kammaṭṭhāna); Mhvs 33, 11; 34, 47; applied to the joints of the body Vism.185 (the 14 mahā°); DhsA.324. -- 4. connection, combination VbhA.191 (hetuphala° & phalahetu° etc.). -- 5. euphonic junction, euphony, “sandhi” SnA 76. See pada°. -- 6. agreement Mhvs 9, 16.

--cheda (1) housebreaking J.I,187 sq.; II,388. -- (2) one who has brought rebirths (=paṭisandhi) to an end Dh.97; DhA.II,187; III,257. --chedaka one who can cut a break, an underminer J.VI,458. --bheda(ka) causing discord J.III,151. --mukha opening of a break (made by burglars) into a house Th.1, 786; PvA.4. --samala (-saṅkaṭīva) refuse heap of a house-sewer (cp. K.S. II.181, 203) D.II,160; M.I,334=S.II,270. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】联盟，联接，关节，连接，协议，音调上的结合。 ~cchedaka, 【形】能割破的人，破坏者。 ~mukha, 【中】（小偷入屋做）破口。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】联盟，联接，关节，连接，协定，音调上的结合。sandhicchedaka,【形】能割破的人，破坏者。sandhimukha,【中】(小偷入屋做)破口。sandhi rules, 转调。sandhiyaṁ, 结生时刻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandhika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°), in pañca° having 5 links or pieces Vism.277. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhovati: {'def': '(saṁ+dhov+a), 洗，冲洗，纯净。参考 Dhovati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+dhovati] to clean A.I,253. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Dhovati。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandhovika: {'def': '[fr. sandhovati] washing; kaṇṇa-sandhovikā khiḍḍā ear-washing sport or gambol (of elephants, with piṭṭhi° etc.) A.V,202. So probably for saṇadhovika at M.I,229, 375. Cp. sāṇadhovana (?). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhunāti: {'def': '[saṁ+dhunāti] to shake D.II,336. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhāna: {'def': '【中】联合，安抚。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+dhā] 1. uniting, conciliation, friendship DA.I,74; DhsA.113. -- 2. bond, fetter Ud.77 (read sandāna?). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】联合，安抚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandhāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sandhāpeti, Caus. of sandahati] combination VvA.349. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhāraka: {'def': '【形】忍受的，抑制的。 ~raṇa, 【中】制止，忍受。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sandhāreti] checking, restraining Vism.205. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】忍受的，抑制的，支援的。sandhāraṇa,【中】制止，忍受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandhārana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sandhāreti] checking Miln.352. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhāreti: {'def': '[saṁ+dhāreti] 1. to hold, bear, carry J.III,184. -- 2. to hold up, support J.IV,167. -- 3. to curb, restrain, check Vin.II,212; J.II,26, 59. --dussandhāriya difficult to keep back J.III,340. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+dhar +e), 忍受，制止，拦截，抑制，支援。【过】sandhāresi。【过分】sandhārita。【独】sandhāretvā。【现分】sandhārenta。【不】sandhāretuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + dhar + e), 忍受，制止，拦截，抑制，支援。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】 ~retvā。【现分】 ~renta。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandhātar: {'def': '[saṁ+dhātar] one who puts together, a conciliator D.I,4; III,171; M.I,345; A.II,209; Pug.57. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhātu: {'def': '【阳】安慰者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】安慰者。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandhāvati: {'def': '[saṁ+dhāvati] to run through, to transmigrate D.I,14; A.II,1; S.III,149; J.I,503; aor. sandhāvissaṁ Dh.153=J.I,76 (=apar’âparaṁ anuvicariṁ DhA.III,128). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+dhāv追+a), 跑著穿过，移居。【过】sandhāvi。【过分】sandhāvita。【独】sandhāvitvā。【现分】sandhāvanta, sandhāvamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + dhav + a), 跑着穿过，移居。【过】 ~āvi。【过分】 ~vita。【独】 ~vitvā。【现分】 ~vanta, ~vamāna。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandhāya: {'def': '(sandahati 的【独】), 团结了。【独】关於，关联。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sandahati 的【独】), 团结了。【无】关于。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see sandahati. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhīyati: {'def': '(sandhāti 的【被】), 被连接，被结合，被合在一起。【过】sandhīyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sandhāti 的【被】), 被连接，被结合，被合在一起。【过】 ~dhīyi。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see sandahati. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhūpeti: {'def': '(saṁ+dhūp+e), 燻制。【过】sandhūpesi。【过分】sandhūpita。【独】sandhūpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + dhūp + e), 熏制。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+dhūpeti] to fumigate S.III,89; Ps.II,167. As sandhūpāyati to cause thick smoke or steam thickly, at Vin.I,225; Sn.p. 15 (=samantā dhūpāyati SnA 154). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandhūpāyati: {'def': '(saŋ + dhūp + āya), 出烟。【过】 ~pāyi。【独】 ~yitvā。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+dhūp+āya), 出烟。【过】sandhūpāyi。【独】sandhūpāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandiddha: {'def': '【过分】已涂毒药。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+diddha] smeared, indistinct, husky Vin.II,202; DA.I,282. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已涂毒药。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandissati: {'def': '(saṁ+dis指出+ya), 被看到，出现，同意。【现分】andissamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+dissati] to be seen together with, to be engaged in, or to tally, agree with, to live conformably to (Loc., e. g. dhamme) D.I,102; II,75; S.V,177; Sn.50; D.II,127; Nett 23; ppr. a-saṁdissamāna invisible Dāvs.IV,30; Caus. saṁdasseti to teach, instruct D.I,126; II,95; Vin.I,18; to compare, verify, D.II,124; ppr. sandassiyamāna D.II,124; J.VI,217 (sunakhesu sandissanti, i. e. they are of no more value). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + dis + ya), 被看到，出现，同意。【现分】 ~samāna。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandita: {'def': '(sandati 的【过分】), 1. 已流动。 2. 已用铁链锁住。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sandati 的【过分】), 1.已流动。2.已用铁链锁住。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+dā: see sandāna] bound, tied, Th.1, 290 (diṭṭhi-sandāna°). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandiyyati: {'def': '& sandīyati [saṁ+diyyati(=dīyati)=Sk. dīyate of dyati, i. e. dā² to cut: see dātta] to be vexed, to resent S.II,200 sq.; J.VI,570 (spelt wrongly sandhīyati; C. expl^s as “maṅku hoti”). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandiṭṭha: {'def': '(sandissati 的【过分】), 已一起看到。【阳】朋友。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sandissati 的【过分】), 已一起看到。【阳】朋友。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sandissati] seen together, a friend J.I,106, 442; Vin.III,42; yathāsandiṭṭhaṁ, where one’s friends live D.II,98; S.V,152. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandiṭṭhi: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+dṛś] the visible world, worldly gain D.III,45, 247; M.I,43; Sn.891; Vin.II,89; Nd¹ 288, 300; °parāmāsin infected with worldliness M.I,97. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa+n+diṭṭhi见)﹐【阴】自己的见解，同见。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandiṭṭhika: {'def': '【形】看得见的，属于这一生的。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. BSk. sandṛṣṭika Divy 426] visible; belonging to, of advantage to, this life, actual D.I,51; II,93, 217; III,5; M.I,85, 474; A.I,156 sq.; II,56, 198; S.I,9, 117, IV.41, 339; Sn.567, 1137; Vism.215 sq. -- As sandiṭṭhiyā (f.) at J.VI,213 (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】看得见的(visible)，这一生的(belonging to this life)。自见的(self-evident)；现世的(immediately apparent)；现证的、当下可见的(visible here and now)；现报(罗什译)；现见(玄奘译)。SA.1.20./I,43.︰Sandiṭṭhiko ayaṁ dhammoti ayaṁ lokuttaradhammo yena yena adhigato hoti, tena tena parasaddhāya gantabbataṁ hitvā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena sayaṁ daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhiko.(自见此‘法’︰证得这出世间法，信‘他’(指圣者)的可去(见证)，之后，以省察智自己亲见到为‘自见’。)Attano phaladānaṁ sandhāya nāssa kāloti akālo, akāloyeva akāliko.(关於自己的给予‘果’是没有时间(的间隔)，即立刻，就这样无时间(的间隔)，为‘即时’)。)Yo ettha ariyamaggadhammo, so attano pavattisamanantarameva phalaṁ detīti attho. “Ehi passa imaṁ dhamman”ti evaṁ pavattaṁ ehipassavidhiṁ arahatīti ehipassiko. (於此，任何圣道法，他自己的转起立即地给予‘果’之义，‘来看这法’，如此值得转起来看的方法为‘来看’。)ādittaṁ celaṁ vā sīsaṁ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi bhāvanāvasena attano citte upanayaṁ arahatīti opaneyyiko.(甚至於火烧衣与头，都要在上旁观，专注在心上用功，值得带近来(取证)，为‘引导’。)Sabbehi ugghaṭitaññū-ādīhi viññūhi “bhāvito me maggo, adhigataṁ phalaṁ, sacchikato nirodho”ti attani attani veditabboti paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhīti.(所有的敏智者等诸行者，“修习我的道，证得果，现证灭”，皆是自知自证，为‘智者各自证知’(缘自觉悟)。) (广说，见Vism.213~218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandiṭṭhiko: {'def': '自见的;现世的;现证的(PS: 自见的 saṁ-diṭṭa-ika)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī: {'def': '(saṁ+diṭṭhi+parāmāsī)﹐染於世俗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '﹐染於世俗者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandoha: {'def': '【阳】堆，大量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】堆，大量。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandosa: {'def': '[saṁ+dosa] pollution, defilement M.I,17; A.III,106, 358; V,292; Sn.327. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sandāleti: {'def': '[saṁ+dāleti] to break; ger. sandālayitvāna Sn.62. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + dāl + e), 打破，打碎。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~lita。【独】~letvā。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+dāl +e), 打破，打碎。【过】sandālesi。【过分】sandālita。【独】sandāletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandāna: {'def': '【中】链，系绳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+dāna, fr. dā to bind: see dāma], a cord, tether, fetter D.II,274; Th.1, 290; Dhp 398; Sn.622; J.II,32; Ud.77 (text sandhāna); DhA.IV,161. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】链，系绳。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sandīpana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā,【阴】点燃，澄清。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】sandīpanā,【阴】点燃，澄清。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sandīpeti: {'def': '(saŋ + dip + e), 点燃，解释。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+dīpeti] to kindle J.V,32. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+dip+e), 点燃，解释。【过】sandīpesi。【过分】sandīpita。【独】sandīpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sanidassana: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+nidassana] visible D.III,217; Dhs.1087. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanivāro: {'def': '﹐【阳】星期六(日语：土曜日)。(Saturn土星，鎭星；梵wanaiwcara 賖乃以室折罗)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sanna: {'def': '² [pp. of sandati] flown J.VI,203 (dadhi°). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of sīdati] sunk Dh.327. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (sandati的【过分】)已流动(flown)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(sīdati的【过分】) 已沉陷(sunk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannaddha: {'def': '(Sannayhati的【过分】) 拴紧，武装自己，部署。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sannayhati] 1. fastened, bound, D.II,350 (susannaddha); Miln.339. -- 2. put on, clothed (with) Pv IV.1³⁶ (°dussa). -- 3. armed, accoutred S.II,284; J.I,179; Dh.387; DhA.IV,144; PvA.154 (°dhanu-kalāpa). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannakaddu: {'def': '[lexicogr. Sk. sannakadru] the tree Buchanania latifolia Abḥp 556. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannata: {'def': '[pp. of saṁ+nam, cp. sannāmeti] 1. bent down, low J.VI,58 (opp. unnata). -- 2. bent, prepared J.V,215 (C. suphassita). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannayhati: {'def': '(saŋ + nah + ya), 拴紧，武装自己，部署。【过】 ~yhi。【独】~hitvā, ~nayha。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+nayhati ‹nah+ya), 拴紧，武装自己，部署(to tie, bind, fasten, to arm oneself)。【过】sannayhi。【独】sannayhitvā, sannayha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nayhati] to tie, bind, fasten, to arm oneself J.I,129; to array, arm D.II,175; Vin.I, 342; to arrange, fit D.I,96; J.I,273; aor. sannayhi D.I,96; inf. sannayhituṁ J.I,179; ger. sannayhitvā D.II,175; J.II,77; & sannahitvā J.I,273. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanneti: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+neti] to mix, knead D.I,74 (Pot. sanneyya); III,29; Vin.I,47 (grd. °netabba); M.I,276; S.II,58 sq.; J.VI,432. -- pp. sannīta. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ni +e), 混合，揉(面等)成团(to mix, knead)。【过】sannesi。【过分】sannita。【独】sannetvā。【义】sanneyya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ni + e), 混合，揉（面等）成团。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 sannita。【独】 sannetvā。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sannibha: {'def': '【形】相似的。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+nibha] resembling D.II,17; Sn.551; J.I,319. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】相似的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannicaya: {'def': '【阳】积聚，贮藏。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nicaya] accumulation, hoarding A.I,94; II,23; Dh.92; Vin.II,95; IV,243; DhA.II,171; A.IV,108; KhA 62 (lohita). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ一起+nicaya向下积聚),【阳】积聚，贮藏。DhA.：‘积聚’有两种：一、业积聚。二、资具积聚。於善业、不善业称为业积聚；四资具，称为资具积聚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannicita: {'def': '【过分】已累积，已囤积。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已累积，已囤积。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nicita] accumulated, hoarded Miln.120. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannidhi: {'def': '[saṁ+nidhi] putting together, storing up D.I,6; Sn.306, 924; Nd¹ 372; --kāra storing D.I,6; --kāraka, storing up, store M.I,523; Vin.I,209; IV,87; D.III,235; A.III,109; IV,370. --kata stored up Vin.II,270; put by, postponed Vin.I,254. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】储存，贮藏。sannidhikāraka,【阳】存货的人。sannidhikata,【形】囤积的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】储存，贮藏。 ~kāraka, 【阳】存货的人。 ~kata, 【形】囤积的。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sannidhāna: {'def': '【中】接近，邻近，储存。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】接近，邻近，储存。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+nidhāna) lit. “putting down together,” proximity Dāvs.V,39. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanniggaṇhāti: {'def': '[saṁ+niggaṇhāti] to restrain S.I,238. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannighāta: {'def': '[saṁ+nighāta] concussion, knocking against each other Dhs.621. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannihita: {'def': '[saṁ+nihita; cp. sannidhi] 1. put down, placed Miln.326. -- 2. stored up Th.2, 409; ThA.267. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已放下，已放置，已安排得好。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已放下，已放置，已安排得好。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannikaṭṭha: {'def': '【中】邻居关系，邻近。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】邻居关系，邻近。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sannikkhepana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+nikkhepana] elimination VbhA.355. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannikāsa: {'def': '【形】相似的，像…的。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】相似的，像…的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+nikāsa] resembling, looking like J.III,522; V,87=VI,306; V,169 (C. dassana); VI,240, 279. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannipatana: {'def': '【中】集会，集合。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】集会，集合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannipatati: {'def': '(saŋ + ni + pat + a), 集合，聚集。【过】 ~pati。【过分】 ~patita。【独】 ~titvā。【现分】 ~patanta。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nipatati] to assemble, come together J.I,167; pp. °ita. Caus. sannipāteti to bring together, convoke D.II,76; Miln.6; Caus. II. sannipātāpeti to cause to be convoked or called together J.I,58, 153, 271; III,376; Vin.I,44; III,71. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ni+pat落下+a), 集合，聚集。【过】sannipati。【过分】sannipatita。【独】sannipatitvā。【现分】sannipatanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannipatita: {'def': '[pp. of °nipatati] come together D.I,2; II,76. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannipāta: {'def': '[fr. sannipatati] 1. union, coincidence S.IV,68 sq.; Miln.60, 123 sq.; Nett 28. -- 2. assemblage, assembly, congregation D.II,5; Miln.7. -- 3. union of the humours of the body Miln.303. -- 4. collocation Dh.352. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】与会者（集合称），集会，体液的集合。 ~pātika, 【形】体液集合的结果。 ~pātana, 【中】召集。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】与会者(集合称)，集会，体液的集合。sannipātika,【形】体液集合的结果。sannipātana,【中】召集。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannipāteti: {'def': '(saŋ + ni + pat + e), 召集，召集…开会。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~pātita。【独】 ~tetvā。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ni+pat落下+e), 召集，召集…开会。【过】sannipātesi。【过分】sannipātita。【独】sannipātetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannipātika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] resulting from the union of the humours of the body A.II,87; V,110; S.IV,230; Miln.135, 137, 302, 304. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannirata: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+nirata] being (quite) happy together J.V,405. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannirumbhana: {'def': '【中】抑制，制止，抑压。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】抑制，制止，抑压。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sannirumbhati: {'def': '(°rundhati) [saṁ+nirumbhati] to restrain, block, impede; ger. sannirumhitvā J.I,109, 164; II,6; VvA.217. sannirumbhitvā J.I,62; II,341. sannirujjhitvā Vism.143; Pot. sannirundheyya M.I,115. ‹-› pp. sanniruddha Vism.278. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannirumbheti: {'def': '(saŋ + ni + rumbh + e), 抑制，阻塞，妨碍。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~bhita。【独】 ~bhetvā。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ni+rumbh +e), 抑制，阻塞，妨碍。【过】sannirumbhesi。【过分】sannirumbhita。【独】sannirumbhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannirumhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. last] restraining, checking, suppression J.I,163; DA.I,193; as °bhana at VbhA.355. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannisajjā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+nissajjā] meeting-place Vin.I,188; II,174=III,66; sannisajja-ṭṭhāna (n.) the same Vin.III,287. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannisinna: {'def': '(Sannisīdati的【过分】) 安顿，平息。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sannisīdati] 1. sitting down together D.I,2; II,109; Vin.II,296; J.I,120. -- 2. (having become) settled, established Vin.II,278 (°gabbhā pregnant). (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannissayatā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+nissayatā] dependency, connection Nett 80. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannissita: {'def': '【形】与…连接的，基於的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nissita, cp. BSk. sanniśrita] based on, connected with, attached to Vism.43, 118, 120, 554 (viññāṇa is “hadaya-vatthu°”; cp. VbhA.163). (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】与…连接的，基于的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sannisīdati: {'def': '(saŋ + ni + sad + a), 安顿，平息，安静下来。【过】 ~sīdi。【独】~ditvā。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nisīdati] 1. (lit.) to sink down, to settle Miln.35. -- 2. (fig.) to subside, to become quiet M.I,121; S.IV,196; A.II,157. -- Caus. sannisādeti to make quiet, to calm M.I,116; A.II,94. -- Caus. II. sannisīdāpeti to cause to halt J.IV,258. -- pp. sannisinna. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ni+sad坐+a), 安顿，平息，安静下来。【过】sannisīdi。【独】sannisīditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sannitodaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+ni+tud] “pricking,” instigating, jeering D.I,189; A.I,187; S.II,282. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannitāḷeti: {'def': '[saṁ+nitāḷeti] to strike J.V,71. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannivasati: {'def': '(saŋ + ni + vas + a) 同居。【过】 ~vasi。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ni+vas住+a) 同居。【过】sannivasi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nivasati] to live together, to associate A.I,78; pp. sannivuttha. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannivaṭṭa: {'def': '[=saṁ+nivatta] returning, return Vin.I,139 sq. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannivesa: {'def': '【阳】露营，殖民。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】露营，殖民。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nivesa] preparation, encampment, settlement ThA.257. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannivesana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+nivesana] position, settlement; pāṭiekka-° private, separate J.I,92. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannivuttha: {'def': '[pp. of sannivasati] living together (with), associating A.IV,303 sq. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannivāreti: {'def': '(saṁ+ni+var+e), 制止，避免。【过】sannivāresi。【独】sannivāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+nivāreti] to restrain, check; to keep together M.I,115; Th.2, 366. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ni + var + e), 制止，避免。【过】 ~esi。【独】 ~retvā。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sannivāsa: {'def': '[saṁ+nivāsa] association, living with; community A.I,78; II,57; D.III,271; Dh.206; J.IV,403; loka-sannivāsa the society of men, all the world J.I,366; II,205. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】协会，同居。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】协会，同居。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sanniyojeti: {'def': '[saṁ+niyojeti] to appoint, command Mhvs 5, 34. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanniyyātana: {'def': '【中】为保护等而移交。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '中】为保护等而移交。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+niyyātana] handing over, resignation DA.I,232. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanniṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】结论，探查。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】结论，探查。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+niṭṭhāna] 1. conclusion, consummation, J.II,166. -- 2. resolve J.I,19; 69; 187; IV,167; Vin.I,255 sq. -- 3. ascertainment, definite conclusion, conviction, J.VI,324; Vism.43. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannāha: {'def': '【阳】盔甲，系在一起。(p319)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. sannay ati),【阳】1.穿，系在一起(dressing, fastening together )。2.盔甲(armour, mail)。titikkhā cammasannāho, 忍耐为盔甲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. sannay ati] 1. dressing, fastening together PvA.231. -- 2. armour, mail S.V,6; J.II,443; Th. 1, 543; J.I,179. (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannāmeti: {'def': '(Caus. of saṁ+nam), 弯(to bend)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of saṁ+nam] to bend M.I,365, 439, 450, 507=S.IV,188 (kāyaṁ sannāmeyya-i. e. to writhe). Cp. Cpd. 162 n. 5 (“strengthen”?). (Page 678)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sannīta: {'def': '[pp. fr. sanneti] mixed, put together, kneaded Mhvs 29, 11 & 12. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sant: {'def': '(ppr. of atthi),1.存在(being, existing)。2.善的，真实(good, true, Nom. sg. m. santo; f. satī; nt. santaṁ; Acc. santaṁ & sataṁ (opp. asaṁ); Instr. satā; Loc. sati & sante; Abl. santato. -- pl. Nom. santo; nt. santāni; Acc. sante; Gen. sataṁ; Instr. sabbhi; Loc. santesu. -- Compar. santatara; superl. sattama.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ppr. of atthi] 1. being, existing D.I,61, 152; A.I,176; It.62 sq.; Sn.98, 124. -- 2. good, true S.I,17; Dh.151. ‹-› Cases: Nom. sg. m. santo Sn.98; Miln.32; Nd² 635 (=samāna); f. satī (q. v.); nt. santaṁ A.V,8; PvA.192; Acc. santaṁ D.II,65; & sataṁ J.IV,435 (opp. asaṁ); Instr. satā D.II,55; Loc. sati D.II,32; A.I,176; III,338; Sn.81; Dh.146; It.85; & sante D.I,61; Abl. santato Nett 88; DhsA.206 sq. -- pl. Nom. santo M.I,24; S.I,71; Sn.450; It.62; Dh.151; nt. santāni D.I,152; Acc. sante Sn.94, 665; Gen. sataṁ M.I,24; S.I,17; Sn.227; Instr. sabbhi D.II,246; S.I,17, 56; Miln.221=J.V,49; Dh.151; Loc. santesu. -- Compar. santatara It.62; superl. sattama (q. v.). (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santa: {'def': '¹ [pp. of sammati¹] calmed, tranquil, peaceful, pure D.I,12; Vin.I,4; S.I,5; A.II,18; Sn.746; Pv IV.1³⁴ (=upasanta-kilesa PvA.230); Miln.232, 409; Vism.155 (°aṅga; opp. Oḷārik’aṅga); DhA.II,13; III,83. -- nt. peace, bliss, nibbāna S.IV,370.

--indriya one whose senses are tranquil A.II,38; Sn.144; Vin.I,195; J.I,506; --kāya of calmed body Dh.378; DhA.IV,114. --dhamma peaceful condition, quietude J.I,506; --bhāva id. Miln.265. --mānasa of tranquil mind Vin.I,195; J.I,506. --vāsa peaceful state DhA.IV,114. --vutti living a peaceful life It.30, 121. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of sammati²] tired, wearied, exhausted Dh.60; J.I,498; Pv.II,9³⁶ (=parissama-patta PvA.127). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(pp. of sammati2), 已疲累，已疲乏(tired, wearied, exhausted)。【形】已存在的。【阳】有品德的人。santakāya,【形】身体镇定的。santatara,【形】更镇定的。santamānasa,【形】心沉著的。santabhāva,【阳】平静。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(sammati1 的【过分】)已冷静，已和平，已宁静(calmed, tranquil, peaceful, pure)。【中】平静，涅盘(peace, bliss, nibbāna)。\xa0santindriya,诸根平静。santakāya,身体平静。santadhamma, 平静的状态。santabhāva, 平静的状态。santamānasa平静心。santavāsa,平静的状态。santavutti平静的生活。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sammati 的【过分】) 1. 已冷静，已和平，2. 已疲累，已疲乏。【形】已存在的。【阳】有品德的人。 ~kāya, 【形】身体镇定的。 ~tara, 【形】更镇定的。 ~mānasa, 【形】心沉着的。 ~bhāva, 【阳】平静。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santacā: {'def': '(f.) [?] bark J.V,202 (sattacaṁ?). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santajjeti: {'def': '(saŋ + tajj + e), 惊吓，威吓。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~jenta, ~jayamāna。【独】 ~jetvā。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+tajjeti] to frighten, scold, menace J.I,479; V,94; ThA.65; PvA.123, 195. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+tajj+e), 惊吓，威吓。【过】santajjesi。【过分】santajjita。【现分】santajjenta, santajjayamāna。【独】santajjetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santaka: {'def': '1 (‹sant; cp. BSk. santaka),【形】【中】1.财产(belonging to; nt. property)。2. due to (Gen.)。3. (being) in the power of (bhayasantaka).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (sa3+antaka),【形】有限的(limited )。opp. anantika。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [sa³+antaka] limited (opp. anantika) S.V,272. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】自己的，【中】财产。 (sa + antaka) 有限的。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [fr. sant; cp. BSk. santaka Divy 280 etc.] 1. belonging to J.I,122; nt. property J.I,91, 494; DhA.I,346. -- 2. due to (Gen.) J.III,408; IV,37. -- 3. (being) in the power of J.IV,260 (bhaya°). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santaneti: {'def': '(& °tāneti) [Caus. of saṁ+tan] to continue A.III,96 sq.; S.IV,104; Pug.66 sq.; SnA 5 (see santāyati). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santappati: {'def': '(saṁ+tap(梵tap)热+ya), 被加热，使悲伤，悲伤。【过】santappi。【现分】santappamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + tap + ya), 被加热，使悲伤，悲伤。【过】 ~ppi。【现分】~pamāna。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+tappati¹] to be heated or chafed; fig. to grieve, sorrow M.I,188; J.III,153. -- pp. santatta¹ ‹-› Caus. °tāpeti to burn, scorch, torment M.I,128; S.IV,56 sq. -- pp. santāpita. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santappeti: {'def': '[Caus. of saṁ+tappati²] to satisfy, please D.I,109; Vin.I,18; J.I,50, 272. -- pp. santappita. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + tapp + e), 使满意，取悦。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 ~penta。【独】 ~petvā, santappiya。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+tapp+e), 使满意，取悦。【过】santappesi。【现分】santappenta。【独】santappetvā, santappiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santappita: {'def': '(Santappeti的【过分】) 使满意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of santappeti] satisfied, pleased J.II,44; Pv.II,8¹¹ (=pīṇita PvA.110). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santara: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+antara, cp. E. with-in] inside; in compⁿ °uttara inner & outer Vin.III,214; IV,281; °uttarena with an inner & outer garment Vin.I,298; ThA.171; °bāhira within & without D.I,74; Dh.315; J.I,125; DA.I,218; DhA.III,488. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santara-bāhira: {'def': '【形】有内外的。santara-bāhiraṁ。【副】内外。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有内外的。 ~raŋ。【副】内外。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santarati: {'def': '[saṁ+tarati²] to be in haste, to be agitated; ppr. °amāna (°rūpa) J.III,156, 172; VI,12, 451. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + tar + a), 匆忙，很快地去。【过】 ~tari。【现分】 ~ramāna。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+tar +a), 匆忙，很快地去。【过】santari。【现分】santaramāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santasana: {'def': '【中】恐怖，惊骇。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】恐怖，惊骇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santasati: {'def': '(saṁ+tas+a), 害怕，受惊吓，被扰乱。【过】santasi。【过分】santasita。【现分】santasanta。【独】santasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + tas + a), 害怕，受惊吓，被扰乱。【过】 ~tasi。【过分】~tasita。【现分】 ~tasanta。【独】 ~sitvā。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+tasati²] to be frightened or terrified, to fear, to be disturbed Miln.92. ppr. santasaṁ J.VI,306 (a°), & santasanto J.IV,101 (a°); Pot. santase J.III,147; V,378; ger. santasitvā J.II,398. -- pp. santasita & santatta. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santasita: {'def': '[pp. of santasati] frightened Miln.92; PvA.260 (=suṭṭhu tasita). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santatara: {'def': 'see sant. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santataŋ: {'def': '【副】参考 Satataŋ。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santataṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [ satataṁ, or fr. saṁ+tan] continually, only in cpds.: °kārin consistent A.II,187; °vutti of consistent behaviour A.II,187; M.I,339; °sīla steady in character M.I,339. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】不变地，不断地，总是。参考 Satataṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santati: {'def': '【阴】连续，期间，世系。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+tan, lit. stretch] 1. continuity, duration, subsistence Dhs.643; Nett 79; Miln.72, 185; VbhA.8, 170, 173; VvA.25; Vism.431, 449. citta° continuity of consciousness Kvu 458; cp. Cpd. 6, 153¹, 252 sq.; dhamma° continuity of states Miln.40; rūpa° of form VbhA.21; saṅkhāra° causal connection of material things Th.1, 716. -- 2. lineage Miln.160. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】连续性，期间，世系。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santatta: {'def': '² [pp. of santasati] frightened, disturbed J.III,77 (=santrasta C.). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Santappati的【过分】) 被加热，使悲伤，悲伤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of santappati] heated, glowing D.II,335; M.I,453; S.I,169 (divasa°); J.IV,118; Miln.325; PvA.38 (soka°). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. santa¹] tranquil Dh.378. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhamati: {'def': 'at J.I,122 is to be read saṇdhamati “to blow.” (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhambhanā: {'def': '【阴】坚硬，硬。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) & °thambhitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. santhambhati] stiffening, stiffness, rigidity Dhs.636; DhsA.324; J.I,10 (a-santhambhana-bhāva). (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】坚硬，硬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santhambhati: {'def': '[saṁ+thambhati] to restrain oneself, to keep firm Sn.701 (imper. med. 2^nd sg. °thambhassu); Pug.65; J.I,255; III,95. -- Caus. °thambheti to make stiff or rigid, to numb J.I,10. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhambheti: {'def': '(saṁ+thambh+e), 使僵硬，使硬，失去知觉。【过】santhambhesi。【过分】santhambhita。【独】santhambhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + thambh + e), 使僵硬，使硬，失去知觉。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~bhita。【独】 ~bhetvā。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. śam, cp. Sk. śāntvana] 1. appeasing Dh.275. -- 2. satisfaction Vv 18^Q. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhara: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+str] a couch or mat Vin.II,162; A.I,277; Ap 97 (tiṇa°). (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】垫，盖子，床单。santhaṇa,【中】扩张，覆盖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】垫，盖子，床单。 ~ṇa, 【中】扩张，覆盖。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santharaka: {'def': '=santhara; only as tiṇa° made of grass Vin.I,24; M.I,501; J.I,360; VvA.262. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santharati: {'def': '(saŋ + thar + a), 铺，散播，覆盖。【过】 ~thari。【独】~tharitvā。【使】 santharāpeti。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+tharati] to spread, strew D.II,84. -- pp. santhata. -- Caus. santhāreti Mhvs 29, 12. -- Caus. II. santharāpeti to cause to be spread Vin.IV,39; Mhvs 29, 9. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+thar+a), 铺，散播，覆盖。【过】santhari。【独】santharitvā。【使】santharāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santharaṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. santharati] spreading, strewing; °vāta a wind which strews things about SnA 67. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhariṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. santhara] by way of spreading; in sabba° so that all is spread, prepared D.II,84; cp. Vin.I,227, 384. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhata: {'def': '(santharati 的【过分】), 已覆盖，已铺。【中】毯子，垫。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(santharati 的【过分】), 已覆盖，已铺。【中】毯子，垫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of santharati] 1. spread, strewn with (-°), covered D.II,160; Vin.III,32; Sn.401, 668. --dhamani°gatta having the body strewn with veins, emaciated Vin.III,146=J.II,283; J.I,346, 350 & passim (see dhamani). Kern, Toev. s. v. considers santata the right spelling. -- 2. (nt.) a rug or mat Vin.III,224; Vv 63⁵ (=tiṇa-santharaka VvA.262). (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhatika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. santhata 2] sleeping on a rug Miln.342, 359. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhava: {'def': '【阳】亲密，相识，行房。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹saṁ+stu),【阳】相识(acquaintance)，亲密(intimacy)，行房。Sn.1-12.(v.207.)︰Santhavāto‚ bhayaṁ jātaṁ, niketā jāyate rajo; Aniketamasanthavaṁ, etaṁ ve munidassanaṁ.(从亲昵中产生恐惧，从家室中产生污秽，不要亲昵，不要家室，这就是牟尼的看法。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+stu, cp. santhuta] acquaintance, intimacy S.I,17; Sn.37, 168, 207, 245; J.I,158; II,27, 42, 180; Dhs.1059; DhsA.364; DhA.I,235. Nom. pl. santhavāni Sn.844=S.III,9; J.IV,98. --°jāta having become acquainted, an acquaintance Nd¹ 198. --a°vissāsin intimate without being acquainted A.III,136. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhavana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+thavati] acquaintance DhsA.364. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹saṁ+thavati)【中】相识(acquaintance)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santhuta: {'def': '(santhaveti 的【过分】), 已相识，已熟悉。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(santhaveti 的【过分】), 已相识，已熟悉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+thuta] acquainted, familiar J.I,365; III,63 (cira°); V,448 (so read for santhata); Sdhp.31; Neg. a° J.III,63, 221; VI,310. Cp. santhava. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhutika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. santhuta] acquainted Vism.78. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhāgāra: {'def': '(Sk.sansthāgāra),【阳】【中】会议厅，断事堂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. sansthāgāra] a council hall, a mote hall D.I,91; II,147; A.II,207; M.I,228, 353, 457; III,207; DA.I,256; J.IV,72, 147; Vin.I,233; VvA.298; DhA.I,347. Cp. saṇṭhāna 3. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】会议厅，断事堂。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santhāna: {'def': 'see saṇṭhāna. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santhāra: {'def': '[saṁ+thāra] spreading, covering, floor(ing) S.I,170; Vin.II,120 (3 kinds of floors: iṭṭhakā°, silā°, dāru°, i. e. of tiles, flags, wood); A.I,136 (paṇṇa°); J.VI,24 (id.); J.I,92; Ps.I,176. -- 2. (cp. paṭi°) friendly welcome A.I,93 (āmisa° & dhamma°). (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】遮盖物，地板。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】遮盖物，地板。(p318)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santhāraka: {'def': '[santhāra+ka cp. BSk. sanstāraka MVastu III,272] a spread, cover, mat Vin.II,113 (tiṇa°), 116. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santi: {'def': '2(‹atthi (as+a+ti)), 【现.3.复】(他们)有，在，存在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】和平，平静，宁静。 ~kamma, 【中】平定，安抚的行为。 ~pada,【中】安静的境界。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(‹wam平息、安静﹐梵wānti),【阴】宁静(tranquillity)，和平(peace)。santikamma,【中】平定，安抚的行为。santipada,【中】安静的境界。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. śam, cp. Sk. °śānti] tranquillity, peace Sn.204; D.II,157; A.II,24; Dh.202.

--kamma act of appeasing (the gods), pacification D.I,12; DA.I,97. --pada “the place of tranquillity”; tranquil state, i. e. Nibbāna A.II,18; VvA.219. --vāda an advocate of mental calm Sn.845 (°vada in verse); Nd¹ 203. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santika: {'def': '(sa2+antika),【形】接近的(vicinity, presence)。【中】接近，出现。santikā, 从。santikāvacara,【形】在附近的，亲密的(keeping or being near)。santikaṁ, 出现(into the presence of, towards)。santike in the presence of, before, with; nibbānasantike; Instr. santikena=by, along with。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [sa²+antika] vicinity, presence; santikaṁ into the presence of, towards J.I,91, 185; santikā from the presence of, from J.I,43, 83, 189; santike in the presence of, before, with D.I,79, 144; Dh.32=Miln.408; Sn.379; Vin.I,12; S.I,33; J.V,467; with Acc. S.IV,74; with Abl. Mhvs 205; nibbānasantike Dh.372; Instr. santikena=by, along with J.II,301 (if not a mistake instead of santikaṁ or santike?).

--âvacara keeping or being near D.I,206; II,139; J.I,67. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】接近的。【中】接近，出现。 santikā, 从。 ~kāvacara, 【形】存在附近的，亲密的。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santike-nidāna: {'def': 'n. 近き因縁物語 [本生経註釈の序文 Nidānakathā 中の釈尊今生物語].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Santikā: {'def': '(f.) [unclear in origin & meaning] a kind of game, “spellicans” (Rh. D.); (Kern: knibbelspel) D.I,6; Vin.II,10; III,180; DA.I,85. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】挑木棒(a kind of game, “spellicans”)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santiṭṭhanā: {'def': '(‹santiṭṭhati),【中】站住，保持，固定，停留。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santiṭṭhati: {'def': '(saŋ + ṭhā + a), 站住，保持，固定，停留。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ṭhā +a), 1.并肩站住，保持(to stand, stand still, remain, continue)。2.建立(to be established, to be put into order)。3.固定( to stick to, to be fixed or settled, to be composed )。4.自制，克己(to restrain oneself)。5.等待(to wait for)。santiṭṭhati; saṇṭhahati & saṇṭhāti; ppr. saṇṭhahanto; pot. saṇṭhaheyya; aor. saṇṭhāsi; saṇṭhahiṁsu (3rd pl.) Inf. saṇṭhātuṁ. pp. saṇṭhita -- Caus. II. saṇṭhapeti (& °ṭhāpeti).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+tiṭṭhati] 1. to stand, stand still, remain, continue A.IV,101 (udakaṁ=stands still), 282, 302 sq.; Pug.31; J.I,26. -- 2. to be established, to be put into order Vin.II,11. -- 3. to stick to, to be fixed or settled, to be composed D.II,206; III,239 (citta); S.V,321; Vin.I,9, 15; It.43. -- 4. to restrain oneself J.I,438. ‹-› 5. to wait for (Acc.) DhA.I,50. -- Forms: pres. santiṭṭhati D.II,206; S.III,133; saṇṭhahati J.VI,160; & saṇṭhāti Pug.31; J.IV,469. ppr. saṇṭhahanto Vin.I,9; Pot. saṇṭhaheyya Vin.II,11; S.V,321. aor. saṇṭhāsi Vin.I,15; saṇṭhahiṁsu (3^rd pl.) S.II,224. Inf. saṇṭhātuṁ J.I,438; DhA.I,50. -- pp. saṇṭhita -- Caus. II. saṇṭhapeti (& °ṭhāpeti). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santosa: {'def': '【阳】快乐，喜悦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】快乐，喜悦。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+tuṣ] contentment DA.I,204. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santuleyya: {'def': '(adj.) [metric for °tulya, grd. of saṁ+tuleti] commeasurable; neg. a° J.VI,283. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santus: {'def': '(s)ita [pp. of santussati] contented, pleased, happy S.III,45 (°tussit’attā); Sn.1040; Dh.362 (=suṭṭhu tusita DhA.IV,90); Mhbv 31 (ss). (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santusita: {'def': '已取悦，已快乐。参考 Santuṭṭha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Santuṭṭha。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Santuṭṭha: m. [BSk. Saṁtuṣita] 刪兜率, 善知足, 都率天 [六欲天の一]. =Tusita', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Santussaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. santussati] content Sn.144. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. santussati),【形】满足的，高兴的(content)。santussana,【中】满足，欢喜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santussati: {'def': '[saṁ+tussati] to be contented, or pleased, or happy; ppr. °amāna Sn.42. -- pp. santuṭṭha & °tusita. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+tus(梵tus)满足+ya), 被使满足，被取悦，被使快乐。【过】santussi。【现分】santussamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + tus + ya), 被使满足，被取悦，被使快乐。【过】 ~ssi。【现分】 ~samāna。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santusska: {'def': '【形】满足的，高兴的。 ~sana, 【中】满足，欢喜。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santuṭṭha: {'def': '(santussati 的【过分】), 已取悦，已快乐(pleased, happy)。santuṭṭhatā,【阴】知足的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(santussati 的【过分】), 已取悦，已快乐。 ~tā, 【阴】知足的状态。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Santusita: m. [BSk. Saṁtuṣita] 刪兜率, 善知足, 都率天 [六欲天の一]. =Tusita', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': 'Santusita m. [BSk. Saṃ-tuṣita] 刪兜率, 善知足, 都卒天=Tusita [六欲天の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[pp. of santussati] pleased, happy D.I,60, 71; M.II,6; A.II,209; IV,232 sq.; V,25, 67, 130, 154. mahā°, the greatly contented one, the Arahant DhsA.407. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santuṭṭhi: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+tuṭṭhi] satisfaction, contentment D.I,71; M.I,13; Sn.265; Dh.204; A.II,27, 31; III,219 sq., 432 (a°); DhA.IV,111. (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】满足，知足，欢喜。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】满足，知足，欢喜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santuṭṭhitā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. formation fr. last] state of contentment D.III,115; A.I,12; Pug.25; Vism.53; Dhs.1367 (a°). (Page 677)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+tan] 1. spreading, ramification, tendril (valli°) KhA 48. -- 2. one of the 5 celestial trees J.VI,239 (°maya made of its flowers). -- 3. (also m,) continuity, succession; lineage S.III,143; DA.I,46; DhsA.63, 217, 297; Vism.555; VbhA.164. Cp. citta° continuity of consciousness Cpd. 167⁷. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.连续，继承。2.子孙。3.蜘蛛网。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(and santati), The terms citta- , rūpa- , khandha- , bhavanga-s. :, etc., are found, here and there, in the Abh. Canon (e.g. Dhs. § 634, Kath. 110; s. Guide V), but they are often met with in the Abh. Com. In the Sutta (Therag. 716) is found saṅkhārasantati .', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 连续性，继承。 2. 子孙。 3. 蜘蛛网。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santānaka: {'def': '(saṁ+tan 伸展),(‹santati 持续、延续) 儿子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[santanā+ka] 1. (nt.)=santāna 1; VvA.94, 162 (°valli a sort of long creeper). mūla° a spreading root S.III,155; J.I,277. -- 2.=santāna 2 VvA.12. ‹-› 3. (nt.) a cobweb Vin.I,48. -- 4. offspring S.I,8. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santāneti: {'def': '(saŋ + tan + e), 连续。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+tan+e), 连续。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Santāpa: {'def': '(‹saṁ+tap(梵tap)热),【阳】【形】热，痛苦，伤心事( burning; heat, fire; fig. torment, torture)。aggisantāpa,火烤。suriyasantāpa,日炙。santāpika,炙热者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. saṁ+tap] burning; heat, fire; fig. torment, torture Sn.1123 (cp. Nd² 636); J.I,502; Miln.97, 324; VbhA.70 (various), 245 (aggi°, suriya°); Sdhp.9, 572. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】热，痛苦，伤心事。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santāpeti: {'def': 'see santappati. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+tap(梵tap)热+e), 加热，燃烧，折磨。【过】santāpesi。【过分】santāpita。【独】santāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + tap + e), 加热，燃烧，折磨。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Santāpita: {'def': '[pp. of santāpeti] heated, aglow Th.2, 504. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santāraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) & °ī (f.) [fr. saṁ+tāreti¹] conveying to the other shore S.IV,174; M.I,134. -- f. santāraṇī Ap 234 (scil. nāvā). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santāsa: {'def': '【阳】恐惧，发抖，震惊。santāsī,【形】发抖的，害怕的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】恐惧，发抖，震惊。 ~sī, 【形】发抖的，害怕的。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+tāsa] trembling, fear, shock A.II,33; S.III,85; J.I,274; Miln.146, 207; PvA.22. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santāsaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁ+tāsana] making frightened, inspiring terror Miln.387. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santāsin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. santāsa] trembling, frightened Dh.351. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santāyati: {'def': '[saṁ+tāyati] to preserve (connect?) Vism.688 (better °dhāyati)=SnA 5 (reads °tāneti). (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Santīraṇa: {'def': '【中】调查。(p317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+tīraṇa),【中】调查，审查(investigation, decision)。santīraṇacitta﹐【中】推度心，这是一个无因果报心；它紧随「领受心」之后生起，其作用是检查刚受到五识与领受心识知的目标。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+tīraṇa] investigation, decision; as t.t. denoting a stage in the act of sense-cognition, judging an impression (see Cpd. 28, 40, 238) DA.I,194; DhsA.264, 269, 272; Vism.459. As °ā (f.) at Nett 82, 191. --°kicca function of judging Tikp 33; Vism.21, 454. (Page 676)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanābhika: {'def': '(sa3+nābhi+ka),【形】有轮毂(nave)的。D.30./III,148.︰Heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni honti sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrāni suvibhattantarāni.(两脚掌生二轮，有千辐(之肉纹相)、有辋(with a felly)、有毂，一切样貌鲜明，分明整然。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有轮毂的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+nābhi+ka] having a nave (of a wheel) D.II,17, 172; A.II,37; at both places comb^d with sa-nemika “with a felly” (i. e. complete). (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sanāmika: {'def': '(sa3+nāma+ika),【形】有名字(having a name, called)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+nāma+ika] having a name, called Bu II.194=J.I,28. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapadi: {'def': '(adv.) [sa²+adv. formⁿ fr. pada] instantly, at once Dāvs.I,62. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】立即地。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa2+adv. formn fr. pada),【无】立即地(instantly, at once)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sapadāna: {'def': '【形】连续的。sapadānaṁ,【副】不断地。sapadānacārikā,【阴】次第乞食〔十三头陀支之一〕(只托钵七家为外道行为之一，见《中部》M.12./ I,78.；M.36./I,238.；M.45./ I,307.；M.51./I,343.；M.94./ II,162.；D.8./ I,166.；D.25./ III,41.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】连续的。 ~naŋ, 【副】不断地。 ~cārikā, 【阴】次第乞食〔十三头陀支之一〕。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sapadānaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. phrase sa-padānaṁ-cārikā; i. e. sa²+Gen. pl. of pada (cp. gimhāna). Weber (Ind. Str. III,398) suggests sapadā+naṁ, sapadā being an Instr. by-form of sapadā, and naṁ an enclitic. Trenckner (Miln. p. 428) says sapadi+ayana. Kern (Toev. II.73) agrees on the whole, but expl^s padānaṁ as pad’āyanaṁ] “with the same steps,” i. e. without interruption, constant, successive (cp. Lat stante pede & Sk. adv. sapadi at once). (1) lit. (perhaps a later use) of a bird at J.V,358 (s. sāliṁ khādanto, without a stop); of a lion at Miln.400 (sapadāna-bhakkha). (2) appl^d in phrase sapadānaṁ carati to go on uninterrupted alms-begging Vin.IV,191; S.III,238; Sn.413; J.I,66; Pv IV.3⁴⁴; VvA.121; and in phrases sapadāna-cārikā J.I,89; °cārika (adj.) Vin.III,15; °cārin M.I,30; II,7; Sn.65; Nd² 646. Also as adj. sapadāna (piṇḍapāta) Vin.II,214. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapajāpatika: {'def': '【形】与妻子在一起的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) 1. with Pajāpati. The passage under pajāpati 1. was distorted through copyist’s default. It should read: “only in one formula, with Inda & Brahmā, viz. devā sa-indakā sa-brahmakā sa-pajāpatikā D.II,274 (without sa-brahmakā); S.III,90= A.V,325. Otherwise sapajāpatika in sense of foll. Also at VbhA.497 with Brahmā.” -- 2. with one’s wife Vin.I,23; IV,62; J.I,345. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】与妻子在一起的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sapallava: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+pallava] with the sprouts VvA.173. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saparidaṇḍā: {'def': '(f.) a cert. class of women, the use of whom renders a person liable to punishment Vin.III,139= A.V,264 M.I,286. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【阴】杖罚所护之女人(国家明示此定罚之女人之名、家或道，往如是女之处者，即构成如是之罪)。sassāmikā saparidandā antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittā pi, tathārūpāsu cārittaṁ na āpajjitā hoti.(其意为：有夫之妇、(侵犯之则会受)杖罚之女，乃至(已有婚约的)装饰华鬘之女，对於如此之妇女不交际。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sapariggaha: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+pariggaha] 1. provided with possessions D.I,247; Sn.393. -- 2. having a wife, married J.VI,369. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】连同所有物或妻子的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】连同所有物或妻子的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saparikkamana: {'def': '(sa+pari+kamana‹kam(行走))﹐可以行走。Pārā.III,151︰Saparikkamanaṁ nāma sakkā hoti yathāyuttena sakaṭena anuparigantuṁ, samantā nisseṇiyā anuparigantuṁ.(可回转的地点︰(在平地，)四轮牛车可以旋转，（在山坡，）有阶梯围绕。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sapatha: {'def': '【阳】誓约。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. wap),【阳】誓约(an oath)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. śap] an oath Vin.I,347; J.I,180, 267; III,138; SnA 418. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapati: {'def': ' [śap, cp. Dhtp 184 “akkose”] to swear, curse S.I,225; J.V,104, 397; Mhvs 25, 113; VvA.336. -- pp. satta³. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sap + a), 骂，诅咒。【过】 sapi。【过分】 sapita。【独】 sapitvā。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sap诅咒+a), 骂(to swear)，诅咒(to curse)。【过】sapi。【过分】sapita。【独】sapitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sapatikā: {'def': '(adj.) having a husband, a woman whose husband is alive J.VI,158; PvA.86. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapatta: {'def': '(Sk. sapatna),【阳】对手，仇敌(hostile, rival)。【形】怀敌意的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. sapatna] hostile, rival Th.2, 347; ThA.242; sapattarājā a rival king J.I,358; II,94; III,416; asapatta without enmity Sn.150; sapatta (m.) a rival, foe, It.83; A.IV,94 sq.; J.I,297. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】对手，仇敌。【形】怀敌意的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sapattabhāra: {'def': '((sa3+patta1+bhāra),【形】以翅膀为负担的(with the weight of the wings, carrying one’s wings with oneself)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sa³+patta¹+bhāra] with the weight of the wings, carrying one’s wings with oneself D.I,71; M.I,180, 268; A.II,210; Pug. 58. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】以翅膀为负担的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sapattaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] hostile, full of enmity D.I,227. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapattika: {'def': '(nt.) the state of a co-wife Th.2, 216; ThA.178. -- Kern, Toev. s.v. proposes reading sā°. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapattī: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. sapatnī] a co-wife D.II,330; J.I,398; IV,316, 491; Th.2, 224; DhA.I,47. asapattī without any co-wife S.IV,249. (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】和妻子在一起。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. sapatnī),【阴】和妻子在一起(a co-wife)。asapattī, 无妻子(without any co-wife S.IV,249.)。sapattivāsā(DhA.v.135./CS:pg.2.38.), 和丈夫在一起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sapatī: {'def': '(f.) having the same husband; a rival wife, a cowife Pv.I,6⁶; II,3². (Page 679)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapaññā: {'def': '有慧人(是由业生三因结生的慧(kammaja-tihetuka-paṭisandhi- paññāya)，为有慧者。「业生三因结生的慧」由无贪、无瞋、无痴的三因善业所生的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saphala: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+phala] bearing fruit, having its reward Dh.52. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有结果的，有果实的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有结果的，有果实的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saphalaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+phalaka] together with his shield Mhvs 25, 63. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sapharī: {'def': '【阴】大头鲃(印度产的一种大型鲤形的可供食用及钓捕的淡水鱼) (Barbus mosal；a sheet fish)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】大头鲃（印度产的一种大型鲤形的可供食用及钓捕的淡水鱼）(Barbus mosal)。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sappa: {'def': '(cp. Sk. sarpa, fr. srp; “serpent”),【阳】蛇(a snake)。sappapotaka,【阳】小蛇。sappa,【阳】。sappaphaṇa, 蛇的兜帽(指眼镜蛇的膨胀起来的颈部)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. sarpa, fr. sṛp; “serpent”] a snake M.I,130; A.III,97, 260 sq.; Sn.768; J.I,46, 259, 310, 372; V,447 (kaṇha°); Nd¹ 7; DA.I,197; SnA 13. Often in similes, e. g. Vism.161, 587; KhA 144; SnA 226, 333. --°potaka a young snake Vism.500; --°phaṇa the hood of a snake KhA 50. -- Cp. sappin. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蛇。 ~potaka, 【阳】小蛇。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sappaccaya: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+paccaya] correlated, having a cause, conditioned D.I,180; A.I,82; Dhs.1083. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有因素的，有条件的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有因素的，有条件的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sappadesa: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+padesa] in all places, all round M.I,153. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappana: {'def': '【中】爬行。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sappati] gliding on DhsA.133. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹sappati),【中】爬行( gliding on)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sappati: {'def': '(sapp+a), 爬行，爬。【过】sappi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sṛp, cp. Vedic sarpati, Gr. e(ρpw, Lat. serpo; Dhtp 194 “gamana”] to creep, crawl: see saṁ°. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sapp + a), 爬行，爬。【过】 sappi。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sappañña: {'def': '【形】明智的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】明智的(wise)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+pañña] wise M.I,225; Sn.591; often as sapañña It.36; Sn.90; J.II,65. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappaṭibhaya: {'def': '【形】危险的，有害的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】危险的，有害的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sappaṭibhāga: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+paṭibhāga] 1. resembling, like D.II,215; J.I,303; Pug.30 sq.; Miln.37. -- 2. having as (equal) counterparts, evenly mixed with M.I,320 (kaṇhasukka°); Miln.379 (id.). (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa3+paṭibhāga)﹐【形】1.相似，像(resembling, like)。2.同比率混合(having as (equal) counterparts, evenly mixed with)。kaṇha-sukka-sappaṭibhāga﹐对比黑、白之法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sappaṭigha: {'def': '(sa有+paṭigha对、碍),【形】可触及的，有对的，有质碍的，撞击的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+paṭigha] producing reaction, reacting D.III,217; Dhs.597, 617, 648, 1089; DhsA.317; Vism.451. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可连络的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sappaṭigha-rūpa: {'def': "'corporeality reacting to sense stimuli', refers to the 5 sense-organs (āyatana, q.v.). - Cf. Vibh. II (s. Guide II, Chap. II) and Vis.M. XIV; further s. paṭigha 2.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Sappaṭipuggala: {'def': '[sa³+paṭipuggala] having an equal, comparable, a friend M.I,27. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappaṭissa: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+paṭissā, cp. BSk. sapratīśa Divy 333, 484] reverential, deferential It.10; Vin.I,45; Vv 84⁴¹ (cp. VvA.347). See also gārava. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐sappatissa﹐【形】崇敬的，敬畏的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sappaṭissava: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+paṭissava] deferential, respectful DhsA.125, 127=J.I,129, 131; --tā deference, reverence Dhs.1327=Pug.24. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappi: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic sarpis] clarified butter, ghee D.I,9, 141, 201; A.I,278; A.II,95, 207 (°tela); III,219; IV,103; Sn.295 (°tela). Dhs.646; J.I,184; II,43; IV,223 (°tela); Vin.I,58, etc. --°maṇḍa [cp. BSk. sarpimaṇḍa Divy 3 etc.] the scum, froth, cream of clarified butter, the best of ghee D.I,201; A.II,95; VvA.172; Pug.70; its tayo guṇā Miln.322. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】酥油(ghee)，澄清奶油(clarified butter)。Pāci.IV,347(CS:p.464)︰Sappi nāma gosappi vā ajikāsappi vā mahiṁsasappi vā. Yesaṁ maṁsaṁ kappati tesaṁ sappi.(酥︰牛乳酥、山羊乳酥、水牛乳酥，凡肉适宜者之酥。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】酥油，澄清奶油。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sappin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. sappati] crawling, creeping; moving along: see pīṭha°. -- (f.) sappinī a female snake J.VI,339 (where the differences between a male and a female snake are discussed). (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappinī: {'def': '【阴】母蛇。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】母蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sappurisa: {'def': '【阳】正直的人。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa(=sat=santsat)真实的)+purisa人),【阳】真善人(他译：善士﹑善知识﹑真人﹑实人﹑真实人) (「比丘们！在这里某一人, 从杀伤生物, 变成已喜乐背离; 从拿起未被给与者, 变成已喜乐背离; 从邪行於诸欲, 变成已喜乐背离; 从妄语, 变成已喜乐背离; 从存续在谷酒﹑果酒﹑醉品﹑放逸之中, 变成已喜乐背离。比丘们！此被叫做真善人。」 (A ii217) sappurisāvassayo﹐倚靠善知识。(AA.4.31.CS:p.2.289-290) Sappurisāvassayoti Buddhādīnaṁ sappurisānaṁ avassayanaṁ sevanaṁ bhajanaṁ, na rājānaṁ(倚靠善知识︰仰赖、结交、交往诸佛(不是诸王)等善知识)。satta sappurisa-dhammā七善士法(seven qualities of the true man)︰dhammaññū, 知法(knowing the doctrine)，atthaññū,知义(knowing the meaning)，attaññū, 自知(knowing self)，mattaññū, 知量(knowing moderation)，kālaññū, 知时(knowing the right time)，parisaññū, 知众 (knowing groups)，puggalaññū, 知人(knowing persons)。 DA.33./III,1039.︰Tattha suttageyyādikaṁ dhammaṁ jānātīti dhammaññū. Tassa tasseva bhāsitassa atthaṁ jānātīti atthaññū. “Ettakomhi sīlena samādhinā paññāyā”ti evaṁ attānaṁ jānātīti attaññū. Paṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu mattaṁ jānātīti mattaññū. Ayaṁ kālo uddesassa, ayaṁ kālo paripucchāya, ayaṁ kālo yogassa adhigamāyāti evaṁ kālaṁ jānātīti kālaññū. Ettha ca pañca vassāni uddesassa kālo. Dasa paripucchāya. Idaṁ atisambādhaṁ. Dasa vassāni pana uddesassa kālo. Vīsati paripucchāya. Tato paraṁ yoge kammaṁ kātabbaṁ. Aṭṭhavidhaṁ parisaṁ jānātīti parisaññū. Sevitabbāsevitabbaṁ puggalaṁ jānātīti puggalaññū.(知法︰知经、偈等法。知义︰知(佛陀)说法之义。自知︰自知“我有这么多戒定慧”。知量︰於接受、受用知量。知时︰知道指出时分，论究时分，证得相应之时分，这是关於时分。知众︰知……。知人︰知应亲近该亲近的人。) AA.7.64./IV,57-8.︰puggalaparoparaññū hotīti evaṁ bhikkhu puggalānaṁ paroparaṁ tikkhamudubhāvaṁ jānanasamattho nāma hoti.(知人胜劣︰如是比丘识别众人高低、利钝。)。A.3.79./I,226.︰“Na pupphagandho paṭivātameti, Na candanaṁ tagaramallikā vā. Satañca gandho paṭivātameti, Sabbā disā sappuriso pavāyatī”ti.(花香扑鼻不逆风，栴檀.沉香.茉莉花；逆风扑鼻善士香，处处风靡善士(香)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sat (=sant)+purisa] a good, worthy man M.III,21, 37; D.III,252 (the 7 s°-dhammā), 274, 276, 283; A.II,217 sq., 239; Dhs.259=1003; Vin.I,56; Dh.54; Pv.II,9⁸; II,9⁴⁵; IV,1⁸⁷; J.I,202; equal to ariya M.I,8; S.III,4; asappurisa=anariya SnA 479. sappurisatara a better man S.V,20. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappāya: {'def': '【形】有益的，健康的，适当的。 ~tā, 【阴】有益。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pā (=pra+ā)+i, cp. pāya. The corresponding BSk. form is sāmpreya (=saṁ+pra+i, with guṇa), e. g. AvŚ I.255; III,110] likely, beneficial, fit, suitable A.I,120; S.III,268; IV,23 sq., 133 sq. (Nibbāna° paṭipadā); J.I,182, 195; II,436 (kiṁci sappāyaṁ something that did him good, a remedy); Vin.I,292, 302; Miln.215 (sappāyakiriyā, giving a drug). nt. something beneficial, benefit, help Vism.34, 87 (°sevin); VbhA.265 (various), 271 (°kathā). -- Ten sappāyas & 10 asappāyas at DhsA.168. -- sappāyâsappāyaṁ what is suitable, and what not J.I,215, 471; used as the last part of a compound, meaning what is suitable with reference to: senāsanasappāya (nt.) suitable lodgings J.I,215. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有益的，健康的，适当的，顺益的。sappāyatā,【阴】有益。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sappāyatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. sappāya] agreeableness, suitability, convenience Vism.79, 121 (a°), 127. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappāṇaka: {'def': '【形】有活生生的生物的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有活生生的生物的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+pāṇa+ka] containing animate beings Vin.III,125; J.I,198. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappāṭihāriya: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+pāṭihāriya] accompanied by wonders D.I,198; S.V,261; Ud.63. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappāṭihīrakata: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+pāṭihīra+kata] made with wonders, substantiated by wonders, substantiated, well founded D.I,198; III,121 (“has been made a thing of saving grace” Dial. III,115, q. v.). (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sappītika: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+pīti+ka] accompanied by the feeling of joy, joyful A.I,81; J.I,10; Vism.86 (opp. nippītika). (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有欢喜陪伴的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有欢喜陪伴的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sapāka: {'def': 'sopāka,【阳】被驱逐的人，吃狗的人。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'sopāka,【阳】1.贱民(an outcast)。2.吃狗的人，屠狗的人。3.一种植物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[san+pāka; cp. Sk. śvapāka] “dog-cooker,” an outcast or Caṇḍāla J.IV,380. Cp. sopāka. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sara: {'def': '² (adj.-n.) [fr. sarati¹ 1. going, moving, following Sn.3, 901 -- 2. fluid, flow J.I,359 (pūti°). (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '⁴ (adj.) [fr. sarati²] remembering M.I,453; A.II,21; DA.I,106. °saṅkappa mindfulness and aspiration M.I,453; III,132; S.IV,76, 137, 190; Nett 16. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '⁵ [Vedic svara, svar, cp. Lat. su-surrus, Ger. surren] sound, voice, intonation, accent Vin.II,108; D.II,24 sq.; A.I,227; Pv.II,12⁴ (of birds’singing=abhiruda C.); J.II,109; Sn.610 (+vaṇṇa, which is doubtful here, whether “complexion” or “speech,” preferably the former); DhsA.17; eight qualities D.II,211, 227; gītāssara song Vin.II,108; bindussara a sweet voice Sn.350; adj. J.II,439; sīhassara with a voice like a lion’s J.V,296, 311 (said of a prince). Cp. vissara. -- In combⁿ with vaṇṇa (vowel) at A.IV,307; Miln.340.

--kutti [=kḷpti; can we compare BSk. svaragupti “depth of voice” Divy 222?] intonation, resonance, timbre, melodiousness of voice Vin.II,108=A.III,251; J.VI,293 (Kern, “enamoured behaviour” [?]); DhsA.16. Cp. Vin. Texts III,72. --bhañña intoning, a particular mode of reciting Vin.I,196; II,108, 316; J.II,109; DhA.I,154. --bhāṇa=°bhañña DhA.II,95 (v. l. °bhañña). --bhāṇaka an intoner, one who intones or recites the sacred texts in the Sarabhañña manner Vin.II,300. --sara an imitative word; sarasaraṁ karoti to make the noise sarasara M.I,128. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 箭。 2. 声音。 3. 元音。 4. 湖。 5. 纤毛甘蔗（见 muñja）。~tuṇḍa, 【中】箭头。 ~tira, 【中】湖滩。 ~bhaṅga, 【阳】断箭。 ~bhañña,【中】吟咏，特别方式的朗诵。 ~bhānaka, 【阳】背诵经典的人。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.箭。2.声音。3.母音。4.湖。5.纤毛甘蔗(见 muñja)。saratuṇḍa,【中】箭头。saratira,【中】湖滩。sarabhaṅga,【阳】断箭。sarabhañña,【中】吟咏，特别方式的朗诵。sarabhānaka,【阳】背诵经典的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Vedic śara] 1. the reed Saccharum sara Miln.342. -- 2. an arrow (orig. made of that reed) D.I,9; Dh.304; Miln.396; DhA 216 (visa-pīta).

--tuṇḍa a beak as sharp as an arrow DhA.III,32. --daṇḍaka shaft of an arrow DhA.II,141. --bhaṅga arrow-breaking Vism.411 (in comp.). (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (m.-nt.) [Vedic saras] a lake J.I,221; II,10; VI,518 (Mucalinda); there are seven great lakes (mahā-sarā, viz. Anotatta, Sīhapapāta, Rathakāra, Kaṇṇamuṇḍa, Kuṇāla, Chaddanta, Mandākini) A.IV,101; D.I,54; J.II,92; DA.I,164, 283; aṇṇava° the ocean D.II,89; cp. A.II,55; Loc. sare J.II,80; sarasmiṁ Sn.1092; & sarasi Mhvs 10, 7; jātassara a natural lake J.I,472 sq. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarabha: {'def': '【阳】鹿(deer)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic śarabha a sort of deer J.IV,267; VI,537] (rohiccasarabhā migā=rohitā sarabhamigā, C. ibid. 538); Sarabhamigajātaka the 483rd Jātaka J.I,193, 406 (text Sarabhaṅga); IV,263 sq.

--pallaṅka “antelope-couch,” a high seat, from which the Bodhisat preaches J.III,342 (cp. vara-pallaṅka J.III,364). --pādaka having legs like those of a gazelle J.I,267. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】獐子。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sarabhasaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [sa²+rabhasaṁ] eagerly, quickly Dāvs.IV,22, 34 sq., 43. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarabhū: {'def': 'f. [Sk. Sarāyu] 薩羅浮, 薩羅遊 [五河の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. saraṭa] a lizard Vin.II,110; A.II,73; J.II,135, 147; SnA 439. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarabū: {'def': '【阳】壁虎。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. saraṭa),【阳】壁虎、蜥蜴(a lizard﹐台语：杜定too7 ting7)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sarada: {'def': '【阳】秋天，年。saradasamaya,【阳】雨季过后的季节。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】秋天，年。 ~samaya, 【阳】雨季过后的季节。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic śarad (f.) traces of the cons. decl. only in Acc. pl. sarado sataṁ “100 autumns” J.II,16] autumn, the season following on the rains Sn.687; Vv 35². °-samaya the autumn season D.II,183; M.I,115; A.IV,102; V,22; It.20; S.I,65; III,141, 155; V,44; VvA.134, 161. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saraja: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+rajo] dusty Vin.I,48; A.II,54. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】染尘的，不纯的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】染尘的，不纯的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saraka: {'def': '【阳】饮具（杯，碗等）。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'a vessel, a drinking vessel J.I,157, 266; IV,384; DA.I,134, 136; Mhvs 32, 32; DhA.II,85; III,7. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】饮具(杯，碗等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sarala: {'def': '长叶松(喜马拉雅松) (the tree Pinus longifolia S.56.32./V,438. J.V,420.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'the tree Pinus longifolia J.V,420 (thus read with B instead of salaḷa [?]). (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarasa: {'def': '(sa3+rasa),【形】有鉴赏力的，雅致的(with its essential properties (see rasa) Nd1 43; sarasabhāva a method of exposition DhsA.71.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+rasa] with its essential properties (see rasa) Nd¹ 43; sarasabhāva a method of exposition DhsA.71. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有鉴赏力的，雅致的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sarassatī: {'def': 'Sarasvatī f. [Sk. Sarasvatī] サラスワティー, 河の名.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'Sarasvatī: f. [Sk. Sarasvatī] サラスワティー [河の名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sarasvatī: {'def': 'Sarassatī: f. [Sk. Sarasvatī] サラスワティー [河の名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sarasī: {'def': '【阴】大池塘(a large pond)。sarasīruha,【中】睡莲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic sarasī] a large pond Vin.II,201=S.II,269; J.V,46. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】湖。 ~ruha, 【中】睡莲。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sarati: {'def': '(sar + a), 记得，向前移动。【过】 sari。【独】 saritvā。【现分】saranta。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2(smr记得+a), 记得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ [śṛ; Dhtp 248: hiṁsā] to crush: see seyyati. Caus. sāreti Vin.II,116 (madhu-sitthakena, to pound up, or mix with beeswax). Cp. saritaka. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [sṛ given by Dhtp 248 as “gati”] to go, flow, run, move along J.III,95 (=parihāyati nassati C.); Pot. sare J.IV,284. -- aor. asarā J.VI,199. -- pp. sarita¹. -- Caus. sāreti (1) to make go A.I,141; III,28=M.I,124=S.IV,176 J.IV,99; Miln.378; Vism.207. -- (2) to rub, to mix Vin.II,116. Also sarāpeti. A Desid. formⁿ is siṁsare (3^rd pl. med.) at Vv 64⁷ (=Sk. sisīrṣati), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 184. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3 (‹wr) 压碎(to crush)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(sar(sr)移动+a),向前移动。【过】sari。【独】saritvā。【现分】saranta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [smṛ, cp. smṛti=sati; Dhtp 248 “cintā”; Lat memor, memoria=memory; Gr. mέrimna care, maρtu witness, martyr; Goth. maúrnan=E. mourn to care, etc.] to remember D.II,234; Vin.I,28; II,79; J.II,29. A diæretic form is sumarati Dh.324; ger. sumariya Mhvs 4, 65. -- 1^st pl. saremhase Th.2, 383; med. sare J.VI,227; imper. sara Th.1, 445; & sarāhi Miln.79; 3^rd sg. saratu Vin.I,273. -- ppr. saraṁ Mhvs 3, 6; & saramāna Vin.I,103. -- aor. sari J.I,330; fut. sarissati J.VI,496. -- ger. saritvā J.I,214. -- pp. sata² & sarita². -- Caus. sāreti to remind Vin.II,3 sq., 276; III,221; sārayamāna, reminding J.I,50; ppr. pass. sāriyamāna Vin.III,221; w. Acc. D.II,234; w. Gen. Dh.324; J.VI,496; with foll. fut. II. (in °tā) Vin.II,125, 4; III,44, 9, etc. -- Caus. II. sarāpeti Vin.III,44; Miln.37 (with double Acc.), 79. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saravant: {'def': '(adj.) [sara⁵+vant] 1. having or making a sound, well-sounding Vin.I,182; A.III,375. -- 2. with a noise Mhvs 25, 38. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sara5+vant,【形】1.有声的(having or making a sound, well-sounding Vin.I,182; A.III,375.)。2.有噪音(with a noise Mhvs 25, 38.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sarañjita: {'def': 'm. [=Sarājita] 倶所楽[地獄名].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Saraṁsā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sa³+raṁsi] the sun (lit. having rays) Mhvs 18, 68. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saraṇa: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Vedic śaraṇa protection, shelter, house, śarman id.; śālā hall; to Idj. *kel to hide, as in Lat. celo, Gr. kalu/ptw to conceal, Oir. celim, Ohg. Ags. helan, Goth. huljan to envelop; Ohg. hella=E. hell; also E. hall, and others] shelter, house Sn.591; refuge, protection D.III,187; Sn.503; J.II,28; DA.I,229; especially the three refuges-the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Brotherhood-A.I,56; D.I,145; J.I,28; usually combined with verbs like upeti Vv 53²; Sn.31; gacchati D.I,116; A.III,242; Vin.I,4; Dh.190; Sn.p. 15, 25; It.63; or yāti Sn.179; Dh.188; asaraṇa, asaraṇībhūta without help and refuge Miln.148. See leṇa 2.

--āgamana=°gamana D.I,146; SnA 42, 157. --gamana (nt.) taking refuge in the three Saraṇas Vin.III,24; S.IV,270. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [fr. smṛ; i. e. sarati²] (nt.) remembrance; --tā (f.) remembering Dhs.14, 23; Pug.21, 25. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (cp. Vedic waraṇa protection, shelter, house, warman id.; wālā hall), Saraṇa,【中】归依，保护，帮忙，避难所，庇护所(shelter, house; refuge, protection; especially the three refuges-the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Brotherhood；常用的动词：upeti, gacchati, yāti)。saraṇāgamana,【中】归依。\xa0【反】asaraṇa, asaraṇībhūta﹐无保护。佛教常用的三归依文如下︰(第二、三遍，或开头加上︰Dutiyam’pi(第二遍)、Tatiyam’pi(第三遍)) Buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi. 佛皈依我去菩汤沙拉曩鹅恰密 ( 我皈依佛 ) Dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi. 法皈依我去汤忙沙拉曩鹅恰密 ( 我皈依法 ) Saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi. 僧皈依我去三康沙拉曩鹅恰密 ( 我皈依僧 )', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (sa+raṇa),【形】诤，伴随争端(concomitant with war)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】归依，保护，帮忙，避难所，庇护所。 ~ṇāgamana, 【中】归依。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [sa+raṇa] concomitant with war Dhs.1294; DhsA.50. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3 (‹smr; i. e. sarati2)【中】记得(remembrance)。saraṇatā (f.) remembering.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saraṇaṁkara: {'def': 'm. 作依, 作帰依[過去仏の一]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Saraṇīya: {'def': '(grd. formation fr. saraṇa2),【形】【中】应该记得的(something to be remembered )，寒喧。cha sārāṇīyā dhammā﹐六和敬法、六可念法、六慰劳法(mettākāyakamma, mettāvacīkamma, mettāmanokamma, sādhāraṇabhogitā, sīlasāmaññatā, dhiṭṭhisāmaññatā)，身业、慈语业、慈意业、所获得与同梵行者俱、戒同、见同(Vin.V. 92~93; D.33./III,245.; A.6.11/III,288 ~ 289.)。《中阿含196经》︰「慈身业(口业、意业)向诸梵行，法是慰劳法、爱法、乐法，令爱令重，令奉令敬，令修令摄，得沙门，得一心，得精进，得涅盘。云云。」(T1.755b)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】应该记得的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [grd. formation fr. saraṇa²] something to be remembered A.I,106. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sari: {'def': 'according to Payogasiddhi=sarisa (sadisa) cp. sarīvaṇṇa J.II,439 (=samāna-vaṇṇa, C.). (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarikkha: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. sadṛkṣa, fr. sadṛś=P. sadisa] like, resembling S.I,66; J.I,443; III,262. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarikkhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [=sarikkha] in accordance with, like J.IV,215; PvA.206, 284. See also kamma°. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarikkhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sarikkha] likeness DhsA.63; as sarikkhakatta (kamma°) at DhsA.347. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarikkhatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sarikkha] resemblance, likeness J.III,241 (taṁ° being like that); VvA.6 (cp. kamma°). (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarisa: {'def': '(adj.) [=sadisa] like, resembling J.V,159. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarisapa: {'def': 'various reading of siriṁsapa M.I,10 etc. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐sarīsapa (=siriṁsapa﹐梵siriṁsapa)﹐【阳】爬虫类(蠍、蛇等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sarita: {'def': '2 (pp. of sarati2), 记得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of sarati²] remembered Vin.II,85. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(pp. of sarati1)向前移动(=anusaṭa, payāta)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of sarati¹] gone, set into motion Dh.341 (=anusaṭa, payāta DhA.IV,49). (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saritabba: {'def': '【潜】可以记得。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】可以记得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saritaka: {'def': '(nt.) powdered stone (pāsāna-cuṇṇa) Vin.II,116; saritasipāṭika powder mixed with gum Vin.II,116. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saritar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. sarati²] one who remembers D.III,268, 286; A.II,35; S.V,197, 225. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saritu: {'def': '【阳】记得的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】记得的人。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saritā: {'def': '(‹sarati1),【阴】河。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic sarit, fr. sarati¹] a river Dhs.1059; saritaṁ Acc. Sn.3; Gen. pl. J.II,442; Nom. pl. saritā Miln.125. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】河。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sarnuṭṭhāpeti: {'def': '(saŋ + u + ṭhā + āpe), 升起，生产，开始。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saroja: {'def': 'saroruha,【中】睡莲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. saroja, saras+ja] “lake-born,” a lotus Dāvs III,13. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'saroruha, 【中】睡莲。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sarojayoni: {'def': '[fr. last] a Brahmā, an archangel Dāvs.I,34. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saroruha: {'def': '(nt.) [saras+ruha] a lotus Dāvs III,83. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarvāstivāda: {'def': '【梵语】说一切有部，部派佛教派别。音译萨婆多部﹐简称有部或一切有部。约在释迦牟尼逝世后300年之际﹐从上座部分出。在此后半个世纪内﹐又有犊子﹑法上﹑密林山等部从此部分出﹐所以也称根本说一切有部。学说以阿毗达磨为立论依据﹐主张“法体恒有”﹐即把世间一切现象分为有为法和无为法两类。有为法是因缘和合的产物﹐有生(产生)﹑住(持续)﹑异(变化)﹑灭(毁灭)的“四相”。有为法计四种﹕表现物质现象的﹐称为色法﹔表现生理或精神现象的眼﹑耳﹑鼻﹑舌﹑身﹑意六识的﹐称心法﹔各种心理作用称心所法﹔心﹑色之外具有生灭的各种现象﹐称心不相应法。无为法指非因缘和合﹑无生灭变化的各种现象。据此五法又细分为七十五种﹐统称五位七十五法。(http://db2.library.ntpu.edu.tw/cpedia/Content.asp?ID=62985)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sarāga: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+rāga] connected with lust, passionate D.I,79; II,299; M.I,59; Vism.410. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】好色的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa有+rāga染),【形】有染的(connected with lust, passionate)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sarājaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+rāja+ka] including the king J.I,126; fem. --ikā Vin.II,188; S.I,162; J.II,113, 114 (sarājika at J.III,453); with the king’s participation Tikp 26 (sassāmika-sarājaka geha). (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarājika: {'def': '【形】包括国王的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】包括国王的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sarājita: {'def': 'denomination of a purgatory and its inhabitants S.IV,309 sq. Various readings Parājita and Sarañjita. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sarāpeti Caus. of sarati²] causing somebody to remember Miln.79. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarāva: {'def': '[Sk. śarāva] a cup, saucer A.I,161; J.I,8; M.III,235 for patta); Miln.282; DA.I,298; PvA.244, 251. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarāvaka: {'def': '=sarāva Vin.I,203; II,142, 153, 222. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarī: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 徘徊的，接着的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sarīra: {'def': '【中】身体。 ~kicca, 【中】身体的舒适，身体的功能，葬礼。 ~ṭṭha,【形】存放在身体中的。 ~dhātu, 【阴】佛舍利。 ~nissanda, 【阳】身体的排泄物。 ~ppabhā, 【阴】身体的光彩。 ~maŋsa, 【中】体肉。 ~vaṇṇa,【阳】体貌。 ~valañja, 【阳】身体的排泄物，粪。 ~valañjaṭṭhāna, 【中】厕所。 ~saṇṭhāna, 【中】体形，体相。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic śarīra] 1. the (physical) body D.I,157; M.I,157; S.IV,286; A.I,50; II,41; III,57 sq., 323 sq.; IV,190. Sn.478, 584; Dh.151; Nd¹ 181; J.I,394 (six blemishes); II,31; antimasarīra one who wears his last body, an Anāgāmin Sn.624; S.I,210; Dh.400. -- 2. a dead body, a corpse D.II,141, 164; M.III,91. -- 3. the bones D.II,164. -- 4. relics Vv 63, 32; VvA.269.

--aṭṭhaka the bony framework of the body DhsA.338. --ābhā radiation of light proceeding from the body, lustre SnA 16 (°ṁ muñcati to send forth), 41 (id.), 140 (id.). --kicca (1) funeral ceremonies, obsequies J.I,180; II,5; VvA.76, 257; PvA.74, 76, 162. -- (2) “bodily function,” satisfying the body’s wants J.II,77; IV,37. --davya (=dabba¹) fitness of body, good body, beauty J.II,137. --dhātu a body relic (of the Buddha) Mhvs 13, 167; VvA.165, 269. --pabhā lustre of the body DhA.I,106. --parikamma attending the body SnA 52. --maṁsa the flesh of the body J.III,53. --vaṇṇa the (outward) appearance of the body Vism.193. --valañja discharge from the body, fæces DhA.II,55; IV,46 (°ṭhāna). See valañja. --saṅghāta perfection of body Vism.194. --saṇṭhāna constitution of the body, bodily form Vism.193. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】身体，舍利。sarīrakicca,【中】身体的舒适，身体的功能，葬礼。sarīraṭṭhaka﹐身体的骨架。sarīraṭṭha,【形】存放在身体中的。sarīradhātu,【阴】佛舍利。sarīranissanda,【阳】身体的排泄物。sarīraparikamma,【中】身体的准备(attending the body)。sarīrappabhā,【阴】身体的光彩。sarīramaṁsa,【中】体肉。sarīravaṇṇa,【阳】体貌。sarīravalañja,【阳】身体的排泄物，粪。sarīravalañjaṭṭhāna,【中】厕所。sarīrasaṇṭhāna,【中】体形，体相。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sarīravant: {'def': '(adj.) [sarīra+vant] having a body S.II,279. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarīvaṇṇa: {'def': 'resembling J.II,439 (v. l. sarīra°). Cp. sari. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sarūpa: {'def': '(adj.) [sa²+rūpa] 1. of the same form A.I,162; Pug.56. -- 2. [sa³+rūpa] having a body A.I,83. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有相同的外形的，有外形的。sarūpatā【阴】类似处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有相同的外形的，有外形的。 ~tā【阴】类似处。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sasa: {'def': '【阳】野兔。sasalakkhaṇa, sasalañchana,【中】月亮的兔影。sasavisāṇa,【中】兔角(不可能性)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic śaśa, with Ohg. haso=E. hare to Lat. canus grey, greyish-brown; cp. Ags. hasu] a hare, rabbit Dh.342; J.IV,85; of the hare in the moon J.IV,84 sq.; sasôlūkā (=sasā ca ulūkā ca) J.VI,564.

--lakkhaṇa the sign of a hare J.I,172; III,55. --lañjana id. VvA.314 (°vant=sasin, the moon). --visāṇa a hare’s horn (an impossibility) J.III,477. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】野兔。 ~lakkhaṇa, ~lañchana, 【中】月亮的兔影。 ~visāṇa, 【中】兔角（不可能性）。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sasaka: {'def': '=sasa J.II,26; IV,85; Cp I.10¹. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sasakkaŋ: {'def': '【副】当然，确定地。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sasakkaṁ: {'def': '【副】当然，确定地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sa+sakkaṁ] as much as one can M.I,415, 514 sq. Sasati¹ [śas. cp. Dhtp 301: gati-hiṁsā-pāṇanesu] to slay, slaughter; sassamāna ppr. pass. J.V,24 (C.=hiṁsamāna). inf. sasituṁ J.VI,291 (read sāsituṁ from sāsati?). pp. sattha. Sasati² [śvas] to breathe (cp. Dhtp 301: pāṇana): see vissasati. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sasambhama: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+sambhama] with great confusion Mhvs 5, 139. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sasambhāra: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+sambhāra] with the ingredients or constituents Vism.20, 352, 353. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa3+sambhāra),【形】有成份的，有配料的(with the ingredients or constituents)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有配料的，有成份的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sasati: {'def': '(sas睡+a), 呼吸，活著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sas + a), 呼吸，活着。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sasattha: {'def': '【形】有武器的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有武器的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sa³+sattha] with swords J.IV,222; DhsA.62. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sasaṅka: {'def': '【阳】月亮。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】月亮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sasaṅkhāra: {'def': '(sa+saṅkhāra)﹐【阳】加行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sasena: {'def': '【阳】有军队陪伴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】有军队陪伴。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sasenaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+sena+ka] accompanied by an army Mhvs 19, 27. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sasin: {'def': '[Sk. śaśin, fr. śaśa] the moon Dāvs.IV,29; J.III,141; V,33; Vv 81¹ (=canda VvA.314), 82³. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sassa: {'def': '【中】玉黍蜀，农作物。sassakamma,【中】农业。sassakāla, 收割时季。sassaghāta﹐破坏农作物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic sasya] corn, crop M.I,116; J.I,86, 143, 152; II,135; Miln.2; DhA.I,97; SnA 48; sassasamaya crop time J.I,143; susassa abounding in corn Vin.I,238; pl. m. sassā J.I,340. °-kamma agriculture J.VI,101; °-kāla harvest time Vin.IV,264; °-ṭṭhāna= °-khetta J.VI,297; dussassa (having) bad crops Vin.I,238; A.I,160; KhA 218 (=dubbhikkhā).

--uddharaṇa lifting the corn Miln.307. --ghāta destroying property S.II,218 sq. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】玉黍蜀，农作物。 ~kamma, 【中】农业。 ~kāla, 收割时季。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sassamana-brāhmana: {'def': '【形】包括沙门和婆罗门的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】包括沙门和婆罗门的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sassamāṇabrāhmaṇa: {'def': '(fem. --ī) together, with samaṇas and brahmins Vin.I,11; D.I,62; III,76, 135; S.V,423; Sn.p. 100; DA.I,174. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sassara: {'def': 'imitative of the sound sarasara; chinnasassara giving out a broken or irregular sound of sarasara M.I,128; see J.P.T.S., 1889, p. 209. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sassata: {'def': '【形】永恒的。sassatadiṭṭhi,【阴】sassatavāda,【阳】常见(持永恒主义，与‘断见’ sassatadiṭṭhi相反的)。sassatavādī,【阳】信仰常见者(持永恒主义者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】永恒的。 ~diṭṭhi,【阴】 ~vāda, 【阳】常见（持永恒主义，与‘断见’相反的）。 ~vādī, 【阳】信仰常见者（持永恒主义者）。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic śaśvat] eternal, perpetual D.I,13; III,31 sq., 137 sq.; M.I,8, 426; A.I,41; Dh.255; Dhs.1099; J.I,468; Miln.413; DA.I,112; dhuvasassata sure and certain Bu II.111 sq.=J.I,19; sassatiyā for ever, Sn.1075; a-sassata J.V,176; VI,315; sassatāyaṁ adv. (Dat.) for ever (?) J.I,468; V,172; Fausböll takes it=sassatā ayam (following the C.), and writes sassat’āyaṁ.

--diṭṭhi eternalism, the doctrine that soul and world are eternal Dhs.1315; S.II,20; III,98; Nett 40, 127. --mūla eternalist Dpvs 6, 25. --vāda an eternalist, eternalism D.I,13; III,108; S.II,20; III,99, 182; IV,400; Pug.38; DA.I,104 sq.; Ps.I,155; VbhA.509. --vādin eternalist Nett 111; Mhbv 110. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sassati: {'def': '【阴】永恒。sassatika,【形】信仰常见者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】永恒。 ~ka, 【形】信仰常见者。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sassatika: {'def': '[fr. sassata] eternalist D.I,17; Mhbv 110 (ekacca° partial eternalist); Vin.III,312; °-ika J.V,18, 19. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sassatisamaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Sk. śaśvatīḥ samāḥ] for ever and ever D.I,14; M.I,8; S.III,143; also sassatī samā J.III,255; Vv 63¹⁴ (explained by sassatīhi samāna, like the eternal things-viz., earth, sun, moon, etc., VvA.265); J.III,256; DA.I,105. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sassirīka: {'def': '【形】光荣的，灿烂的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+sirī+ka] glorious, resplendent J.I,95; II,1; IV,189; VI,270. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa3+sirī+ka),【形】光荣的，灿烂的(glorious, resplendent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sassu: {'def': '【阴】婆母（家娘），岳母。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Sassū(Vedic wvawrū),【阴】婆母(家娘)，岳母，婆婆(mother-inlaw )。Gen. sassuyā; sassudeva﹐把婆婆当作神明一样服侍(worshipping one’s mother-in-law as a god)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sassāmika: {'def': '(sa+sāmin+ka),【形】1.有丈夫的(having a husband, married)。2.有主人的(having a master, belonging to somebody)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+sāmin+ka] 1. having a master, belonging to somebody D.II,176. -- 2. having a husband, married J.I,177, 397; IV,190. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有丈夫的，有主人的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sassū: {'def': 'and Sassu (f.) [Vedic śvaśrū: see sasura] mother-inlaw Vin.III,137; A.II,78; Th.2, 407; Sn.125; J.I,337; III,425 sq.; V,286 (Gen. sassuyā); DhA.I,307; VvA.110, 121; PvA.89. sassu-sasure, see sasura; sassudeva worshipping one’s mother-in-law as a god S.I,86; J.IV,322. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sasura: {'def': '【阳】岳父，家翁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic śvaśura, f. śvaśrū (see P. sassū), Idg. *sǔekuros, *sǔekrū; cp. Gr. e(kurόs & e(kurά; Lat. socer & socrus; Goth. swaihra & swaíhrō, Ags. swēor & sweger; Ohg. swehur & swigar] father-in-law Vin.III,137; M.I,168; A.II,78; VvA.69, 121; Th.2, 407 (sassura); J.I,337; sassu-sasurā mother- and father-in-law J.II,347; III,182; IV,38; VI,510; the form sassura Th.2, 407 has probably arisen through analogy with sassu. -- f. sasurī VvA.69. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】岳父，家翁。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sasī: {'def': '【阳】月亮。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sasin) (Sk. wawin, fr. wawa),【阳】月亮。【形】有兔的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sasīsa: {'def': '(sa3+sīsa),【形】连同头(together with the head)。sasīsaṁ﹐直到头(up to the head)。sasīsaka, 头和全身(head and all)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+sīsa] together with the head; sasīsaṁ up to the head D.I,76, 246; J.I,298; sasīsaka head and all D.II,324; Sn, p. 80. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sasīsaŋ: {'def': '【副】连同头，直到头。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sata: {'def': '2(‹sar(smr)记得；pp. of sarati(= sumarati), of cp. BSk. smrta AvW.I,228; II.197),记忆、正念(remembering, mindful, conscious)。【中】具正念者，真人。【形】深切注意的，有意识的。satasampajāna, 正念正知。satokārin, 修习正念者(cultivator of sati, Pṭs.I,175.)。sussata,正念好者。dussata, 正念不好者。KhA.181.︰Sataṁ pasatthāti sappurisehi Buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakehi aññehi ca devamanussehi pasatthā.(称赞真人︰对真人、对佛陀、独觉、佛陀的圣弟子，以及天人(圣弟子)的称赞(称赞戒德等功德)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (num. card.) [Vedic śataṁ; cp. Av. sat∂m, Gr. e(-katόn, Lat. centum; Goth. hund=hundred; Idg. *kmtóm fr. dkm̊tóm (=decem), thus ultimately the same as daśa, i. e. decad (of tens)] a hundred, used as nt. (collect.), either --° or as apposition, viz. gāma-sataṁ a hundred (ship of) villages DhA.I,180; jaṭila-satāni 100 ascetics Vin.I,24; jāti° D.I,13; or gāthā sataṁ 100 stanzas Dh.102.-Often in sense of “many” or “innumerable,” e. g. °kaku, °raṁsi, etc.; cp. °satāni bahūni J.IV,310, 311.

--kaku having a hundred corners, epithet of a cloud A.III,34=S.I,100 (v. l. sattakatu) see J.P.T.S. 1891--93 p. 5. --patta the Indian crane (or woodpecker?) J.II,153; 388; Miln.404. --padī a centipede A.II,73; III,101, 306; IV,320; V,290; Vin.II,110, 148; Miln.272. --pala (Th.1, 97) see pala. --pāka (-tela) oil mixture, worth 100 pieces J.IV,281; DhA.II,48; III,311; see also pāka. --puñña 100, i. e. innumerable merits Vism.211. --pupphā Anethum sowa, a sort of dill or fennel J.VI,537. --porisa of the height of a hundred men, extremely high, attribute of a hell Vv 52, 12 sq.; name of a hell J.V,269. --mūlī Asparagus racemosus Abhp 585. --raṁsi “having 100 rays,” the sun Sdhp.590; J.I,44. --rasabhojana food of 100 flavours DhA.III,96 (v. l. all pass, satta°) --vaṅka a kind of fish Abhp 672. --vallikā an under-garment, arranged like a row of jewelry Vin.II,137. --sahassa one hundred thousand J.II,20; Miln.88; 136; DhA.II,86. --sahassima id. S.II,133. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】深切注意的，有意识的。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】百。 ~ka, 【中】百位一伙，百个一组。 ~kkaku, 【形】有百个突出部分的（云朵）。 ~kkhattuŋ, 【副】百次。 ~dhā, 【副】百方。~pāka, 【中】为百次治疗的药（油）。 ~puññalakkhaṇa, 【形】有百福相的。 ~porisa, 【形】有百人的高度。 ~sahassa, 【中】十万〔直译：百千，但汉语不这样写，汉语的写法是：十万〕。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1,【中】百。sataka,【中】百位一夥，百个一组。satakkaku,【形】有百个突出部分的(云朵)。satakkhattuṁ,【副】百次。satadhā,【副】百方。satapāka,【中】为百次治疗的药(油)。satapuññalakkhaṇa,【形】有百福相的。sataporisa,【形】有百人的高度。satasahassa,【中】十万(百千)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of sarati, of smṛ, cp. BSk. smṛta AvŚ I.228; II,197] remembering, mindful, conscious D.I,37; II,94; III,49, 107, 222, 269; M.I,520 (su-ssata & dus-sata); S.IV,211; A.III,169 (+sampajāna), 325; IV,311; Sn.741; Dhs.163; DA.I,211. -- satokārin cultivator of sati Ps.I,175. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satabhisaja: {'def': '【阳】危宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】危宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satadhā: {'def': '(adv.) [sata+dhā, cp. ekadhā, dvidhā etc.] in 100 ways, into 100 pieces D.II,341. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sataka: {'def': '(cp. BSk. wataka) ,【中】百(a hundred, collection of 100 J.I.74.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. BSk. śataka] a hundred, collection of 100 J.I,74. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satakkhattuṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [cp. dvi-kkhattuṁ, ti-kkhattuṁ etc.] a hundred times. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】百次。dvi-kkhattuṁ, 二百次。ti-kkhattuṁ,三百次。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satamūlī: {'def': '【阴】芦笋(Asparagus﹐一种东半球多年生植物 (Asparagus racemosus) 芦笋有叶状茎，鳞状叶，开小花)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】芦笋（一种东半球多年生植物 (Asparagusracemosus) 芦笋有叶状茎，鳞状叶，开小花）。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Satapadī: {'def': '【阳】蜈蚣。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】蜈蚣(centipede)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satapatta: {'def': '【中】睡莲。【阳】啄木鸟。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】睡莲。【阳】啄木鸟(woodpecker)，台语︰暗光鸟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sataraŋsī: {'def': '【阳】太阳。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sataraṁsī: {'def': '【阳】太阳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satata: {'def': '【形】不变的，持续不断的。satataṁ,【副】不变地，不断地，总是。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [with satrā “completely” & sadā “always” to sa° “one”: see saṁ°; lit. “in one (continuous) stretch”] continual, chronic. Only in nt. satataṁ (adv.) continually A.IV,14; It.116; Sn.507; Miln.70; Pv.II,8¹¹ (=nirantaraṁ PvA.110); III,7¹⁰ (=sabbakālaṁ PvA.207); PvA.177; and as °- in °vihāra a chronic state of life, i. e. a behaviour remaining even & the same A.II,198=D.III,250, 281. Cp. sātacca. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不变的，持续不断的。 ~taŋ, 【副】不变地，不断地，总是。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Satekiccha: {'def': '【形】可医治的，可原谅的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+tekiccha] curable, pardonable Miln.192, 221; Vism.425. See tekiccha. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可医治的，可原谅的。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sateratā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. śatahradā, śata+hrada] lightning J.V,14, 203. Also as sateritā Vv 33³; 64⁴; VvA.161 (=vijjulatā), 277. As saderitā at Th.1, 260. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sathera: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+thera] including the Theras A.II,169 (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sati: {'def': '2﹐【现分】在正在存在者(单.处格)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】念，记忆，深切注意。 ~ndriya, 【中】念根。 ~paṭṭhāna, 【中】念处。 ~mantu, 【形】深思的，小心的。 ~sampajañña, 【中】念与正知。 ~sambojjhaṅga, 【阳】念觉支。 ~sammosa,~sammoha, 【阳】失念（记忆的损失），健忘。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '念;记忆;忆念;正念;念住', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '念，观察(见注*1)。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '1(‹sar(梵smr)记忆﹑念；Vedic smrti),【阴】念、记住(memory)、深切注意(mindfulness)。satindriya,【中】念根。satipaṭṭhāna(梵 smrty’upasthāna),【中】念处(paṭṭhāna可作两种解释，即：「建立起」(upaṭṭhāna)及作为「念」(sati)的「立足处」。《长部》10经)及《中部》22经〉详述该四念处修习法；《相应部》〈念处相应〉则收集了一些有关修习念处的较短的经。satimantu,【形】深思的，小心的。satisampajañña,【中】正念正知(DhsA.p.53.︰Saratīti sati. Sampajānātīti sampajaññaṁ.记得为‘念’。一起彻知︰‘正知’。)。「(正)念」、\x1f「正知」都是美心所--善心时才会具备，有「(正)念」时，正知(慧心所)不必然具备，但是有「正知」时，「(正)念」必然具备。《增支部》A.6.29./III,325.：Idhānanda, bhikkhu satova abhikkamati satova paṭikkamati satova tiṭṭhati satova nisīdati satova seyyaṁ kappeti satova kammaṁ adhiṭṭhāti.Idaṁ, ānanda, anussatiṭṭhānaṁ evaṁ bhāvitaṁ evaṁ bahulīkataṁ satisampajaññāya saṁvattatī”ti.(阿难！此有比丘，从(正)念而往、(正)念而还、(正)念而立、(正)念而坐、(正)念而卧、(正)念而作事。阿难！此随念处，若如是修、如是多所作者，则能引生(正)念正知。) satisambojjhaṅga,【阳】念觉支。satisammosa, satisammoha,【阳】失念(记忆的损失)，健忘。“Manujassa sadā satīmato, mattaṁ jānato laddhabhojane. Tanukassa bhavanti vedanā, saṇikaṁ jīrati āyupālayan”ti. (常具正念人，取食知其量；是人(苦)受少，衰缓寿得长。) (S.13./I,82.)( satīmato ‹ sati-mant。tanukassa (?) 疑由tanukā assa变来，tanukā, f.Nom.pl.修饰vedanā，assa ‹ ima(ṁ), m.Gen.sg.「他的」，指manujassa。āyu-pālayaṁ, ppr.m.Nom.sg. ‹ pā(l), pāleti, pālayati (3sg.), pālayant (ppr.))正在保护。《广释》(CS:p.110)：「记住是‘念’，无混乱，那联合的诸法具有令忆念的相。」(Saraṇaṁ sati, asammoso, sā sampayuttadhammānaṁ sāraṇalakkhaṇā. )。upaṭṭhitā sati, 现前的念(presence of mind )。parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā, 使鼻端的念现起之后(鼻端︰parimukha(pari遍+mukha口、面))。satiṁ paccupaṭṭhāpetuṁ, 使念现起。kāyagatā sati, 身至念(intentness of mind on the body, realization of the impermanency of all things. M.III,89; A.I,43; S.I,188; Miln.248; 336.)。muṭṭhasati, 忘念(forgetful, careless. D.III,252, 282. )。maraṇasati, 死随念(mindfulness as to death A.IV,317 sq.; J.IV.216; SnA 54; PvA.61, 66. )。asati, 失念(not thinking of, forgetfulness DhsA 241; Instr. asatiyā through forgetfulness, without thinking of it, not intentionally Vin.II,2892. )。sammāsati,正念。%b\xa0\xa0sati-qdhipateyya (sat°) dominant mindfulness A.II,243 sq.; It 40. --satiuppāda arising, production of recollection J.I.98; A.II,185; M.I,124. satisatullapakāyika, 沙睹罗巴天群(a class of devas S.I,16 sq. )。--sativinaya disciplinary proceeding under appeal to the accused monk’s own conscience Vin.I,325; II.79 etc.; M.II,247; A.I,99. sativepullappatta having attained a clear conscience Vin.II,79. --satisaṁvara restraint in mindfulness Vism 7; DhsA 351; SnA 8.)。--satisambojjhaṅga (e. g. S.V,90) see (sam)bojjhaṅga. --satisammosa loss of mindfulness or memory, lack of concentration or attention D.I,19; Vin.II,114; DA.I,113; Pug.32; Vism 63; Miln.266. )。《法集论》(Dhs.#52., #332)：「在此时什么是‘念’？在此时，凡是1念(处在记住)、2随念(一而再地记住)、3回想(当面记住，离去后，再回想)、4记住(免得再记)、5忆持性(听闻与诵习的忆持)、6不漂浮性(溶入所缘)、7不忘性(久做久说都不忘。不失忆性(asammusanatā= naṭṭha-muṭṭhassatitā))、8念根(使作统治的根)、9念力(没有懒惰的摇摆)、10正念(正确的念、有利可图的念、善念)，在此时是念。」(Katamā tasmiṁ samaye sati hoti? Yā tasmiṁ samaye 1sati 2anussati 3paṭissati sati 4saraṇatā 5dhāraṇatā 6apilāpanatā 7asammussanatā sati 8satindriyaṁ 9satibalaṁ 10sammāsati– ayaṁ tasmiṁ samaye sati hoti.) (cf.DhsA.(CS:p.191)：(1) 「於念根的解释，处在记住为‘念’。」(Satindriyaniddese saraṇakavasena sati.) (2)「一而再地记住，处於紧随著记住，为‘随念’。」(Punappunaṁ saraṇato anussaraṇavasena anussati.) (3)「当面的(记住)，离去了之后，处於再回想记住，为‘回想’。住於倾注或沉浸於增长。」(Abhimukhaṁ gantvā viya saraṇato paṭisaraṇavasena paṭissati. Upasaggavasena vā vaḍḍhitamattametaṁ.) (4)「作记住，为‘记住’。因为记住，经历记住之称，所以，它免除再次作念的把握。所谓的念即是记住，为在此处之意。」(Saraṇākāro saraṇatā. Yasmā pana saraṇatāti tiṇṇaṁ saraṇānampi nāmaṁ, tasmā taṁ paṭisedhetuṁ puna satiggahaṇaṁ kataṁ. Satisaṅkhātā saraṇatāti ayañhettha attho.) (5)「听闻与诵习的忆持状态，为‘忆持性’。」(Sutapariyattassa dhāraṇabhāvato dhāraṇatā.) (6)「进入之称，进去之意，不漂浮的状态，为‘不漂浮性’。就像葫芦在水上飘浮，不溶入(水)，没有如是的所缘。那所缘确实溶入，因此称为‘不漂浮性’。」(Anupavisanasaṅkhātena ogāhanaṭṭhena apilāpanabhāvo apilāpanatā. Yathā hi lābukaṭāhādīni udake plavanti, na anupavisanti, na tathā ārammaṇe sati. ārammaṇañhesā anupavisati, tasmā apilāpanatāti vuttā.) (7)「久做久说都不忘记，为‘不忘性’。」(Cirakatacirabhāsitānaṁ asammussanabhāvato asammussanatā.) (8)「於现起的相，光亮的相，和使作统治的根，所谓的念的根为‘念根’。」(Upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇe jotanalakkhaṇe ca indaṭṭhaṁ kāretīti indriyaṁ. Satisaṅkhātaṁ indriyaṁ satindriyaṁ.) (9)「没有懒惰的摇摆，为‘念力’。」(Pamāde na kampatīti satibalaṁ.) (10)「正确的念、有利可图的念、善念，为‘正念’。」(Yāthāvasati niyyānikasati kusalasatīti sammāsati.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic smṛti: see etym. under sarati²] memory, recognition, consciousness, D.I,180; II,292; Miln.77--80; intentness of mind, wakefulness of mind, mindfulness, alertness, lucidity of mind, self-possession, conscience, self-consciousness D.I,19; III,31, 49, 213, 230, 270 sq.; A.I,95; Dhs.14; Nd¹ 7; Tikp 61; VbhA.91; DhsA.121; Miln.37; upaṭṭhitā sati presence of mind D.III,252, 282, 287; S.II,231; A.II,6, 218; III,199; IV,232; It.120; parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhāpetuṁ to surround oneself with watchfulness of mind M.III,89; Vin.I,24, satiṁ paccupaṭṭhāpetuṁ to preserve self-possession J.I,112; IV,215; kāyagatā sati intentness of mind on the body, realization of the impermanency of all things M.III,89; A.I,43; S.I,188; Miln.248; 336; muṭṭhasati forgetful, careless D.III,252, 282; maraṇasati mindfulness as to death A.IV,317 sq.; J.IV,216; SnA 54; PvA.61, 66. asati not thinking of, forgetfulness DhsA.241; Instr. asatiyā through forgetfulness, without thinking of it, not intentionally Vin.II,289². sati (sammā°) is one of the constituents of the 8--fold Ariyan Path (e g. A.III,141 sq.; VbhA.120): see magga 2.

--âdhipateyya (sat°) dominant mindfulness A.II,243 sq.; It.40. --indriya the sense, faculty, of mindfulness A.II,149; Dhs.14. --uppāda arising, production of recollection J.I,98; A.II,185; M.I,124. --ullapakāyika, a class of devas S.I,16 sq. --paṭṭhāna [BSk. smṛty’upasthāna Divy 126, 182, 208] intent contemplation and mindfulness, earnest thought, application of mindfulness; there are four satipaṭṭhānas, referring to the body, the sensations, the mind, and phenomena respectively, D.II,83, 290 sq.; III,101 sq., 127, 221; M.I,56, 339; II,11 etc.; A.II,218; III,12; IV,125 sq., 457 sq.; V,175; S.III,96, 153; V,9, 166; Dhs.358; Kvu 155 (cp. Kvu. trslⁿ 104 sq.); Nd¹ 14, 45, 325, 340; Vism.3; VbhA.57, 214 sq., 417. -- See on term e. g. Cpd. 179; and in greater detail Dial. II.322 sq. --vinaya disciplinary proceeding under appeal to the accused monk’s own conscience Vin.I,325; II,79 etc.; M.II,247; A.I,99. --vepullappatta having attained a clear conscience Vin.II,79. --saṁvara restraint in mindfulness Vism.7; DhsA.351; SnA 8. --sampajañña mindfulness and self-possession D.I,70; A.II,210; DA.I,183 sq. --sambojjhaṅga (e. g. S.V,90) see (sam)bojjhaṅga. --sammosa loss of mindfulness or memory, lack of concentration or attention D.I,19; Vin.II,114; DA.I,113; Pug.32; Vism.63; Miln.266. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. sata¹] consisting of a hundred, belonging to a hundred; yojanasatika extending one hundred yojanas Vin.II,238; vīsaṁvassasatika of hundred and twenty years’standing Vin.II,303. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satima: {'def': '(fr. sata1), 第一百(the hundredth, S.II,133; J.I.167)。pañcasatima, 第五百。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [superl. formⁿ fr. sata¹] the hundredth S.II,133; J.I,167 (pañca°). (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satimant: {'def': '(fr. sati) ,【形】具念(mindful, thoughtful, contemplative, pensive; Nom. sg. satimā; satīmā (in verse) Sn.45; nt. satīmaṁ Sn.211; Gen. satimato; satīmato; Nom. pl. satīmanto; Gen. satīmataṁ; satimantānaṁ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sati] mindful, thoughtful, contemplative, pensive; Nom. sg. satimā D.I,37; S.I,126; Sn.174; A.II,35; Dhs.163; DhA.IV,117; Pv IV.3⁴⁴; satīmā (in verse) Sn.45; nt. satīmaṁ Sn.211; Gen. satimato S.I,208; satīmato S.I,81; Dh.24; Nom. pl. satīmanto D.II,120; Dh.91; DhA.II,170; Gen. satīmataṁ Dh.181; It.35; satimantānaṁ A.I,24. -- See also D.III,77, 141, 221 sq.; A.IV,4, 38, 300 sq., 457 sq.; Nd¹ 506; Nd² 629. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satimā: {'def': '(fr. sati), 具念(单.具格)。DA.22./III,758.︰Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato.(具念︰具有(在)身摄受身之(正)念。SA.1.20./I,47.︰Satimāti iminā vāyāmasatisamādhayo gahitā.(具念︰以念与定精进收摄。) satimato, 具念(阳.单.与格, adj.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satipaṭṭhāna: {'def': '念处。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '念住,念处[cattāro-satipaṭṭhāna(四)念处(身受心法)][PS:paṭṭhāna 出发;发趣; Paṭṭhāna 发趣论(南传七论之一)]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': 'the 4 \'foundations of mindfulness\', lit. \'awarenesses of mindfulness\' (sati-upaṭṭhāna), are: contemplation of body, feeling, mind and mind-objects. - For sati, s. prec.

A detailed treatment of this subject, so important for the practice of Buddhist mental culture, is given in the 2 Satipaṭṭhāna Suttas (D. 22; M. 10), which at the start as well as the conclusion, proclaim the weighty words: "The only way that leads to the attainment of purity, to the overcoming of sorrow and lamentation, to the end of pain and grief, to the entering of the right path, and to the realization of Nibbāna is the 4 foundations of mindfulness."

After these introductory words, and upon the question which these 4 are, it is said that the monk dwells in contemplation of the body, the feelings, the mind, and the mind-objects, "ardent, clearly conscious and mindful, after putting away worldly greed and grief."

These 4 contemplations are in reality not to be taken as merely separate exercises, but on the contrary, at least in many cases, especially in the absorptions, as things inseparably associated with each other. Thereby the Satipaṭṭhāna Sutta forms an illustration of the way in which these 4 contemplations relating to the 5 groups of existence (khandha, q.v.) simultaneously come to be realized, and finally lead to insight into the impersonality of all existence.

(1) The contemplation of the body (kāyanupassanā) consists of the following exercises: mindfulness with regard to in-and-outbreathing (ānāpānasati , q.v.), minding the 4 postures (iriyāpatha, q.v.), mindfulness and clarity of consciousness (satisampajañña, q.v.), reflection on the 32 parts of the body (s. kāyagatāsati and asubha), analysis of the 4 physical elements (dhātuvavatthāna, q.v.), cemetery meditations (sīvathikā q.v.).

(2) All feelings (vedanānupassanā) that arise in the meditator he clearly perceives, namely: agreeable and disagreeable feeling of body and mind, sensual and super-sensual feeling, indifferent feeling .

(3) He further clearly perceives and understands any state of consciousness or mind (cittānupassanā), whether it is greedy or not, hateful or not, deluded or not, cramped or distracted, developed or undeveloped, surpassable or unsurpassable, concentrated or unconcentrated, liberated or unliberated.

(4) Concerning the mind-objects (dhammānupassanā), he knows whether one of the five hindrances (nīvaraṇa, q.v.) is present in him or not, knows how it arises, how it is overcome, and how in future it does no more arise. He knows the nature of each of the five groups (khandha, q.v.), how they arise, and how they are dissolved. He knows the 12 bases of all mental activity (āyatana q.v.): the eye and the visual object, the ear and the audible object, .. mind and mind-object, he knows the fetters (saṃyojana, q.v.) based on them, knows how they arise, how they are overcome, and how in future they do no more arise. He knows whether one of the seven factors of enlightenment (bojjhaṅga, q.v.) is present in him or not, knows how it arises, and how it comes to full development. Each of the Four Noble Truths (sacca, q.v.) he understands according to reality.

The 4 contemplations comprise several exercises, but the Satipaṭṭhāna should not therefore be thought of as a mere collection of meditation subjects, any one of which may be taken out and practised alone. Though most of the exercises appear also elsewhere in the Buddhist scriptures, in the context of this Sutta they are chiefly intended for the cultivation of mindfulness and insight, as indicated by the repetitive passage concluding each section of the Sutta (see below). The 4 contemplations cover all the 5 groups of existence (khandha, q.v.), because mindfulness is meant to encompass the whole personality. Hence, for the full development of mindfulness, the practice should extend to all 4 types of contemplation, though not every single exercise mentioned under these four headings need be taken up. A methodical practice of Satipaṭṭhāna has to start with one of the exercises out of the group \'contemplation of the body\', which will serve as the primary and regular subject of meditation: The other exercises of the group and the other contemplatons are to be cultivated when occasion for them arises during meditation and in everyday life.

After cach contemplation it is shown how it finally leads to insight-knowledge: "Thus with regard to his own body he contemplates the body, with regard to the bodies of others he contemplates the body, with regard to both he contemplates the body. He beholds how the body arises and how it passes away, beholds the arising and passing away of the body. \'A body is there\' (but no living being, no individual, no woman, no man, no self, nothing that belongs to a self; neither a person, nor anything belonging to a person; Com.): thus he has established his attentiveness as far as it serves his knowledge and mindfulness, and he lives independent, unattached to anything in the world.\'\'

In the same way he contemplates feeling, mind and mind-objects.

In M. 118 it is shown how these four foundations of mindfulness may be brought about by the exercise of mindfulness on in-and-out breathing (ānāpāna-sati, q.v.).

Literature: The Way of Mindfullness, tr. of Sutta and Com., by Soma Thera (3rd ed; Kandy 1967, BPS). - The Heart of Buddhist Meditation, by Nyanaponika Thera (3rd ed.; London. Rider & Co.). The Foundations of Mindfulness (tr. of M. 10), Ñaṇasatta Thera (Wheel 19). The Satipaṭṭhāna Sutta and its Application to Modern Life, V. F. Guṇaratana (WHEEL 60). - The Power of Mindfulness by Nyanaponika Thera (WHEEL 121/122).', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Satisampajañña: {'def': '(sati念+sam一起+pajañña知),【中】正念正知。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satitā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. formation fr. sati] mindfulness, memory DhsA.405 (-°). (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satova: {'def': '(sato+va, sato‹sata ‹sar(梵smr)记得；va=eva表强调)。记忆、忆念。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satta: {'def': '3 (sapati (诅咒) 的【过分】; Sk.wapta)﹐已诅咒(to curse)，已发誓(sworn)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '⁴ (num.) [cp. Vedic sapta, Gr. e(ptά; Av. hapta; Lat. septem, Goth. sibun=E. seven etc.) number seven. It is a collective and concluding (serial) number; its application has spread from the week of 7 days (or nights), and is based on astronomical conception (Babylon!), this science being regarded as mystic, it invests the number with a peculiar magic nimbus. From time-expressions it was transferred to space, esp. when originally connected with time (like satta-bhūmaka the 7--storied palace; the Vimānas with 700 towers: see vimāna 2 & 6; or the 7 great lakes: see sara³; °yojana 7 miles, cp. the 7 league-boots!). Extremely frequent in folklore and fairy tales (cp. 7 years of famine in Egypt, 7 days’festivals, dragon with 7 heads, 7 ravens, 7 dwarfs, 7 little goats, 7 years enchantment, etc. etc.). ‹-› For time expressions see in cpds.: °āha, °māsa, °ratta, °vassa. Cp. Sn.446 (vassāni); J.II,91 (kāyā, thick masses); DA.I,25 (of the Buddh. Scriptures: sattahi māsehi saṅgītaṁ); DhA.II,34 (dhanāni), 101 (maṅgalā); the collective expression 7 years, 7 months, 7 days at J.V,48; the 7X70 ñāṇavatthūni S.II,59; and the curious enumeration of heptads at D.I,54. -- Cases: Instr. sattahi D.I,34; Gen. sattannaṁ D.I,56; Loc. sattasu D.II,303=M.I,61.

--aṅga a couch with 7 members (i. e. four legs, head support, foot support, side) Vin.II,149. --aṭṭha seven or eight J.II,101. --āgārika a “seven-houser,” one who turns back from his round, as soon as he has received alms at 7 houses D.I,166. --ālopika a “seven-mouthful,” one who does not eat more than 7 bits D.I,166. --āha (nt.) seven days, a week of 7 days [cp. BSk. saptaka Divy 99] D.II,248; Vin.I,1, 139; J.I,78; II,85; IV,360; V,472; VI,37; DhA.I,109; VvA.63. satta° 7 weeks DhA.I,86; cp. satta-satta-divasā J.V,443. --ussada (see ussada 2) having 7 prominences or protuberances (on the body), a sign of a Mahāpurisa D.II,18; III,144, 151 (i. e. on both hands, on both feet, on both shoulders, on the back). --guṇa sevenfold Mhvs 25, 36. --jaṭa with seven plaits (of hair) J.V,91 (of a hunter). --tanti having 7 strings, a lute VvA.139. --tāla (-matta) (as big as) 7 palm trees DhA.II,62, 100. --tiṁsa 37 (see bodhipakkhiya-dhammā). --dina a week Mhvs 11, 23. --pakaraṇika mastering the 7 books of the Abhidhamma J.I,312; DhA.III,223. --patiṭṭha sevenfold firm D.II,174; Miln.282. --padaṁ for 7 steps J.VI,351 (Kern, Toev. s. v. “unfailing”). --bhūmaka (pāsāda) (a palace) with 7 stories Mhvs 37, 11; J.I,58; IV,378; DhA.I,180, 239; IV,209. --māsaṁ (for) seven months PvA.20. --yojanika 7 miles in extent J.V,484. --ratana the 7 royal treasures D.I,88; It.15; J.V,484. --ratta a week J.VI,230 (dve°= a fortnight), 304; Sn.570. --vassika 7 years old Miln.9. 310; DhA.II,87, 89 (sāmaṇera), 139; PvA.53 (Saṅkicca arahattaṁ patvā); DhA.III,98 (kumāro arahattaṁ patto); J.V,249. On the age of seven as that of child arahants see Mrs. Rh. D. in Brethren introd. xxx. --vīsati twenty seven DhA.I,4. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp, Vedic sattva living being, satvan “strong man, warrior,” fr. sant] 1. (m.) a living being, creature, a sentient & rational beiṅg, a person D.I,17, 34, 53, 82; II,68; A.I,35 sq., 55 sq.; S.I,135; V,41; Vin.I,5; Miln.273; Vism.310 (defⁿ: “rūp’ādisu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattā ti sattā,” thus=satta¹); Nett 161; DA.I,51, 161; VbhA.144. --naraka° a being in purgatory (cp. niraya°) Vism.500. -- 2. (nt.) soul (=jīvita or viññāṇa) Pv.I,81 (gata°=vigata-jīvita PvA.40). ‹-› 3. (nt.) substance Vin.I,287. nissatta non-substantial, phenomenal DhsA.38.

--āvāsa abode of sentient beings (see nava¹ 2) D.III,263, 268; A.V,53; Vism.552; VbhA.168. --ussada (see ussada 4) teeming with life, full of people D.I,87, 111, 131. --loka the world of living creatures SnA 263, 442; Vism.205. See also saṅkhāra-loka. --vaṇijjā slave trade DA.I,235=A.III,208 (C.: manussa-vikkaya). (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】七。 ~ka, 【中】七个一伙。 ~kkhattuŋ, 【副】七次。 ~guṇa, 【形】七倍的。 ~tanti, 【形】有七线的。 ~tālamatta, 【形】有七棵棕榈树的高度。 ~tiŋsā, 【阴】三十七。 ~paṇṇī, 【阳】鸭脚树（一种东亚和菲律宾的森林乔木 (Alstonia Scholaris)，其树皮过去用作抗间发性病）。。 ~bhūmaka, 【形】有七层楼的。 ~ratana, 【中】七宝（即：金、银、珍珠、红宝石、天青石、珊瑚和钻石）。 ~ratta, 【中】一个星期（七夜）。 ~rasa, ~dasa, 【形】十七。 ~vassika, 【形】七岁。 ~vīsati,【阴】二十七。 ~saṭṭhi,【阴】六十七。 ~sattati, 【阴】七十七。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sajjati 的【过分】), 已附着，已执着。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ [pp. of sapati to curse; Sk. śapta] cursed, sworn J.III,460; V,445. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (sajjati 的【过分】), 已附著(hanging)，已执著(=有情)(clinging or attached to)。cp.āsatta1 & byāsatta(byāsatta)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of sañj: sajjati] hanging, clinging or attached to Vin.I,185; D.II,246; Nd¹ 23, 24; Dh.342; J.I,376. Cp. āsatta¹ & byāsatta. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】生物，众生，有情。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '4(cp.Vedic sapta),【形】七。sattaka,【中】七个一夥。sattakkhattuṁ,【副】七次。sattaguṇa,【形】七倍的。sattatanti,【形】有七线的。sattatālamatta,【形】有七棵棕榈树的高度。sattatiṁsā,【阴】三十七。sattapaṇṇī,【阳】鸭脚树(黑板树﹐Alstonia Scholaris，其树皮过去用作抗间发性病。七叶窟由此树得名)。sattapanni-guhā﹐七叶树窟(又作七叶窟、七叶园，即七叶树之窟，在王舍城附近。佛灭度后，第一次经典结集即在此举行)。sattabhūmaka,【形】有七层楼的。sattaratana,【中】七宝(即：1.金sovaṇṇa、2.银rūpiya、3.毘琉璃(天青石)veḷuriya、4.水晶phalika、5.红宝石lohitaṅka、6.猫眼石masāragalla、7.珊瑚(砗磲，台语：sian hou5)pavāḷa)；七宝另作：1.轮宝cakkaratana、2.象宝hatthiratana、3.马宝assaratana、4.摩尼宝maṇiratana、5.女宝itthiratana、6.居士宝gahapatiratana、7.主兵(将军)宝pariṇāyakaratana。sattaratta,【中】一个星期(七夜)。sattarasa, sattadasa,【形】十七。sattavassika,【形】七岁(七腊)。sattavīsati,【阴】二十七。sattasaṭṭhi,【阴】六十七。sattasattati,【阴】七十七。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(Sk. & Vedic sattva, living being; satvan “strong man, warrior,” fr.sant),【阳】生物(a living being)，衆生(creature)，有情(a sentient)。古译：萌类，刚决，含识，有情类，群萌，闇塞，萨埵(音译)。。《清净道论》(Vism.10.)︰「「有情」──因为他们对於色等五蕴以欲与贪而执著(sattā)极执著(visattā)故为有情(sattā)。」S.5.10./I,135.作：“Kiṁ nu sattoti paccesi, Māra diṭṭhigataṁ nu te; Suddhasaṅkhārapuñjoyaṁ, nayidha sattupalabbhati. “Yathā hi aṅgasambhārā, hoti saddo ratho iti; Evaṁ khandhesu santesu, hoti sattoti sammuti.%9“Dukkhameva hi sambhoti, dukkhaṁ tiṭṭhati veti ca; Nāññatra dukkhā sambhoti, nāññaṁ dukkhā nirujjhatī”ti.(云何缘有情，魔,你岂非有邪见？唯诸行堆聚，有情不可得。如组合材料，乃名之为车，如有诸蕴在，称之为有情，若痛苦生起、及痛苦止没，苦不由他生，苦不由他灭。) cf.《论事》Kv.p.66；《大义释》MNd.p.439；Mil.p.28.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sattadhā: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. satta⁴, cp. dvidhā] in seven pieces D.I,94; II,235; Sn.783; J.V,33, 493; DhA.I,17, 41. Cp. phalati. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattakkhattuparama: {'def': '(sattakkhattu七回+parama最超越(a.))﹐极七次者，极七返有者，须陀洹最多会再投生於人间与天界七次的。SA.48.24./III,238.︰Yassa sattakkhattuṁ paramā upapatti, aṭṭhamaṁ bhavaṁ nādiyati, ayaṁ sattakkhattuparamo nāma.(他顶多只投生七次，不会有第八有，此名为‘极七次者’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sattakkhattuṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [cp. tikkhattuṁ etc.] seven times Vin.I,3; It.18; sattakkhattuparamaṁ seven times at the utmost; °parama one who will not be reborn more than seven times S.II,134 sq.; A.I,233, 235; IV,381; Kvu 104; Pug.15 sq.; Nett 189; KhA 187; J.I,239; DhA.III,61, 63. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattali: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. saptalā, name of var. plants, e. g. jasmine, or many-flowered nykkanthes, Halāy. 2, 52] the plantain, and its flower J.IV,440 (=kadali-puppha C.; so read for kandala°); and perhaps at Th.2, 260 for pattali (q. v.), which is expl^d as kadali(-makula) at ThA.211. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattama: {'def': '【形】第七的。 ~mī, 【阴】第七天，处所格〔巴利语法〕，潜在语气〔巴利语法〕。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】第七的。sattamī,【阴】第七天，处所格〔巴利语法〕，潜在语气〔巴利语法〕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (num. ord.) [fr. satta⁴] the seventh D.I,89; Sn.103. -- f. °mī Sn.437. Often in Loc. °divase on the 7th day Sn.983; J.I,395; Miln.15; PvA.6, 74. --°bhavika one who has reached the 7^th existence (or rebirth) Kvu 475 (cp. trslⁿ 271⁴). (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [superl. fr. sant] best, excellent Sn.356; J.I,233. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattapaṇṇi-rukkha: {'def': 'N. of a tree Mhvs 30, 47; cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā N. of a cave KhA 95. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattapaṇṇileṇa: {'def': '(satta-paṇṇi-guhā, 梵Sapta-parṇa-guhā), 七叶窟(在王舍城，第一次佛教圣典结集在此地举行)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sattarasa: {'def': '(num. card.) [satta⁴+rasa²=dasa] seventeen Vin.I,77; IV,112 (°vaggiyā bhikkhū, group of 17). (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattari: {'def': '=sattati, at S.II,59 sq. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattati: {'def': '【阴】七十。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. saptati] seventy D.II,256; Ap 118, 126 & passim. As sattari at S.II,59; Ap 248 & passim. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】七十。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sattatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. satta²] state of having existence D.I,29. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattava: {'def': '=satta² [a diaeretic sattva] J.V,351. Cp. Lal. Vist. 520. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattha: {'def': '【中】 1. 科学，艺术，知识。 2. 刀，枪矛。【阳】 3. （在沙漠或危险地区结伴而行的）旅行队，商队。 ~ka, 【中】小刀。 ~kamma, 【中】外科手术。 ~kavāta, 【阳】刺骨的痛苦。 ~gamanīya, 【形】旅行队要经过的（路径）。 ~vāha, 【阳】旅行队的领袖。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.科学，艺术，知识。2.刀，枪矛。【阳】3.在沙漠或危险地区结伴而行的)旅行队，商队。SA.1.53./I,93.︰satthoti saddhiṁcaro, jaṅghasattho vā sakaṭasattho vā.(商队︰同行的商队、步行的商队、四轮马车的商队。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ [sa³+attha; Sk. sārtha] a caravan D.II,130, 339; Vin.I,152, 292; Nd¹ 446; Dh.123 (appa° with a small c.), Miln.351.

--gamanīya (magga) a caravan road Vin.IV,63. --vāsa encampment D.II,340, 344. --vāsika & °vāsin caravan people J.I,333. --vāha a caravan leader, a merchant D.II,342; Vv 84⁷ (cp. VvA.337); leader of a band, teacher; used as Ep. of the Buddha S.I,192; It.80, 108; Vin.I,6. In exegesis of term Satthā at Nd¹ 446=Nd² 630=Vism.208. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '⁶ [cp. Sk. śvasta, śvas] breathed: see vissattha. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Vedic śastra, fr. śas to cut] a weapon, sword, knife; coll. “arms” D.I,4, 56; Sn.309, 819 (expl^d as 3: kāya°, vacī°, mano°, referring to A.IV,42, at Nd¹ 151); J.I,72, 504; Pv III,10²; SnA 458 (°mukhena); PvA.253. Often in combⁿ daṇḍa+sattha (cp. daṇḍa 4), coll. for “arms,” Vin.I,349; D.I,63; A.IV,249; Nd² 576. --satthaṁ āharati to stab oneself S.I,121; III,123; IV,57 sq.

--kamma application of the knife, incision, operation Vin.I,205; SnA 100. --kāraka an assassin Vin.III,73. --vaṇijjā trade in arms A.III,208. --hāraka an assassin Vin.III,73; S.IV,62. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Vedic śāstra, fr. śās to teach] a science, art, lore Miln.3; SnA 327, 447. --vāda° science of right belief SnA 540; sadda° grammar SnA 266; supina° dream-telling SnA 564. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '⁴ [pp. of sāsati; śās] told, taught J.II,298 (v. l. siṭṭha). (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '⁵ (adj.) [wrong for satta=śakta] able, competent J.III,173 (=samattha C.). (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satthaka: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. sattha¹] a knife, scissors Vin.II,115 (daṇḍa°, with a handle); J.V,254 (as one of the 8 parikkhāras); Miln.282. aya° at J.V,338 read °paṭṭaka.

--nisādana [cp. Sk. niśātana] knife-sharpening DhA.I,308, cp. Miln.282 °nisāna [=Sk. niśāna]. --vāta a cutting pain A.I,101=307; J.III,445. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. sattha³] belonging to a caravan, caravan people, merchant PvA.274. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】小刀。satthakkamma,【中】外科手术。satthakkavāta,【阳】刺骨的痛苦。satthakagamanīya,【形】旅行队要经过的(路径)。satthakvāha,【阳】旅行队的领袖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satthar: {'def': '[Venic śāstṛ, n. ag. fr. śās] teacher, master. -- Nom. satthā D.I,49; Sn.179; Acc. satthāraṁ D.I,163; Sn.153, 343; Instr. satthārā D.I,163; Instr. satthunā Mhvs 32, 19; Gen. satthu D.I,110; It.79; Vin.I,12; Gen. satthuno D.II,128; Sn.547, 573, Loc. satthari Dhs.1004; Nom. and Acc. pl. satthāro D.I,230; A.I,277; Miln.4; Gen. pl. satthārānaṁ J.I,509. -- See e. g. D.I,230; A.I,277; Vin.I,8; Th.2, 387. -- The 6 teachers (as in detail at D.I,52--59 & var. places) are Pūraṇa Kassapa, Makkhali Gosāla, Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta, Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, Ajita-Kesakambalī. -- 5 teachers at Vin.II,186; A.III,123. -- 3 at D.I,230; A.I,277. ‹-› The Master par excellence is the Buddha D.I,110; II,128; III,119 sq.; A.III,248; IV,120, 460; Sn.153, 545, 955 (see exegesis in detail at Nd¹ 446=Nd² 630), 1148; Vism.389, 401, 604. -- gaṇa-satthar leader of a company J.II,41, 72; satthāra-dassana sight of the Master SnA 49; satthu-d-anvaya successor of the M. Sn.556. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satthi: {'def': '【阴】大腿。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】大腿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt. & f.) [cp. Sk. sakthi] the thigh Vin.II,161; Th.1, 151; Vv 81¹⁷; J.II,408; III,83; VI,528; antarā° between the thighs A.II,245. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satthika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sattha³] belonging to a caravan D.II,344. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satthu: {'def': 'see sattu²; satthu° see satthar. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】老师，主人，佛陀。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(satthar)(梵wāstr),【阳】(大)师(经中说的是指佛陀)，主人。atthi satthari pasādo,是净信於师尊者。【阳.单.主】satthā。【阳.复.主】satthā﹐sattharo。《杂阿含130经》︰「如求大师，如是胜师者，顺次师者，教诫者，胜教诫者，顺次教诫者，通者，广通者，圆通者，导者，广导者，究竟导者，说者，广说者，顺次说者，正者，伴者，真知识者，亲者，愍者，悲者，崇义者，安慰者，崇乐者，崇触者，崇安慰者，欲者，精进者，方便者，勤者，勇猛者，固者，强者，堪能者，专者，心不退者，坚执持者，常习者，不放逸者，和合者，思量者，忆念者，觉者，知者，明者，慧者，受者，思惟者，梵行者，念处者，正勤者，如意足者，根者，力者，觉分者，道分者，止者，观者，念身者，正忆念者，亦复如是。」(60个名称，参见《瑜伽师地论》卷八三, 大正30.760.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satthuka: {'def': '“having a teacher,” in atīta° [belonging to the whole cpd.] whose teacher is dead D.II,154. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satthuna: {'def': '[?] a friend J.I,365. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satthuvaṇṇa: {'def': '[satthar°+vaṇṇa] gold (lit. the colour of the Master) Vin.III,238, 240. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Satti: {'def': '¹ (f.) [fr. śak, cp. Vedic śakti] ability, power Dhtp 508 Usually in phrase yathā satti as much as one can do, according to one’s ability Cp I.10⁶; DhA.I,399; or yathā sattiṁ D.I,102, or y. sattiyā DhA.I,92. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(cp. Vedic wakti, orig. identical with satti1) ,【阴】矛，匕首(knife, dagger, sword)。Vism.313 (dīghadaṇḍasatti﹐with a long handle)；(tikhiṇasatti a sharp knife). mukhasatti﹐(piercing words(a spear, javelin))。sattipañjara﹐(lattice work of spears)。sattilaṅghana﹐(javelin dance)。sattisimbalivana﹐(the forest of swords (in purgatory))。sattisūla﹐(a sword stake)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 1. 能力，权力，力量。 2. 矛，匕首。 ~sūla, 【中】长矛。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (f.) [cp. Vedic śakti, orig. identical with satti¹] 1. knife, dagger, sword A.IV,130; J.II,153; Vism.313 (dīgha-daṇḍa° with a long handle); DhA.I,189; II,134 (tikhiṇa° a sharp knife). mukha° piercing words J.I,341. -- 2. a spear, javelin S.I,13; A.II,117; J.I,150.

--pañjara lattice work of spears D.II,164. --laṅghana javelin dance J.I,430. --simbali-vana the forest of swords (in purgatory) J.V,453. --sūla a sword stake, often in simile °ûpamā kāmā S.I,128; A.III,97; Vism.341. Also N. of a purgatory J.V,143 sq. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(‹wak, cp. Vedic wakti),【阴】能力，力，力量(ability, power)。paccayasatti, 【阴】缘力(「缘法」产生「缘所生法」之力，缘力存在於「缘法」中。)。Dhtp 508 Usually in phrase yathāsatti as much as one can do, according to one’s ability; or yathā sattiṁ, or yathā sattiyā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sattika: {'def': 'see tala°. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattisūla: {'def': '【中】长矛、铁刺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sattu: {'def': '¹ [Vedic śatru] an enemy J.V,94 (Acc. pl. sattavo); Vism.234 (°nimmathana). (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】敌人，炒过的面粉。sattubhastā,【阴】充满炒过的面粉的皮袋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. śaktu] barley-meal, flour Vin.II,116 (satthu); Nd¹ 372; J.III,343 sq.; Pv III,1³; Dhs.646.

--āpaṇa baker’s shop J.VI,365. --pasibbaka flour sack; °bhasta id. J.III,346. (Page 673)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】敌人，炒过的面粉。 ~bhastā, 【阴】充满炒过的面粉的皮袋。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sattuka: {'def': '[fr. sattu¹] an enemy J.III,154; Mhvs 32, 18. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sattāha: {'def': '【中】七天（一个星期）。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】七天(一个星期)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Satī: {'def': '(fr. sant, ppr. of as),【阴】1.成为(being)。2.贞洁的女人(a good or chaste woman, 【反】asatī)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】贞洁的女人。(p315)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. sant, ppr. of as] 1. being J.III,251. -- 2. a good or chaste woman Abhp 237; asatī an unchaste woman Miln.122=J.III,350; J.V,418; VI,310. (Page 672)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sava: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sru, savati] dripping, flowing with ( -- ˚) Pv ii.911 (madhu˚, with honey). (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savacanīya: {'def': '[sa3+vacanīya] (the subject of a) conversation Vin ii.5, 22, 276. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savaka: {'def': 'see saṁ. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savana: {'def': '【中】流动。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. savati] flowing Dh.339; J iv.288; v.257; savana -- gandha of the body, having a tainted odour Th.2, 466. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. śru: see suṇāti] 1. the ear Sn.1120; Miln.258. -- 2. hearing D i.153, 179; A i.121; S i.24; Vin i.26; Sn.265, 345; Dh.182; J i.160, 250; Miln.257; Nd1 188. sussavanaŋ sāvesi she made me hear a good hearing, she taught me a good thing J i.61; savanaṭṭhāne within hearing J iv.378. dhamma˚ hearing the preaching of the Dhamma Vin i.101 etc. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】流动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Savanka: {'def': 'a sort of fish J v.405. Cp. satavanka & sacca- vanka. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savantī: {'def': '【阴】河。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic sravat, orig. ppr. of sru, sravati] a river Vin.II,238; Bu II.86=J.I,18; J.VI,485; Miln.319. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】河。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Savanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of suṇāti] pleasant to hear D ii.211; J i.96 ( -- ṇ -- ); J vi.120=122 (savaneyya). (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savara: {'def': '[Epic Sk. śabara, cp. śabala=P. sabala] an aboriginal tribe, a savage Vin.I,168; Miln.191. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savasa: {'def': '[sa⁴+vasa] one’s own will DhsA.61 (°vattitā; cp. Expos. 81). (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savati: {'def': '(su挤向前+a), 流。【过】savi。【现分】savanta。【独】savitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(su + a), 流。【过】 savi。【现分】 savanta。【独】 savitvā。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sru; cp. Sk. srotas stream; Gr. r(eu_ma, r(e/w to flow; Ags. strēam=stream; Oir. sruth] to flow Sn.197, 1034; J vi.278; Dh.370. -- ppr. fr. savantī ThA.109. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savaṅka: {'def': '【形】有弯曲的。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有弯曲的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Savaṇa: {'def': '【中】听，耳朵。【阳】女宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹suṇāti﹐su(梵wru)听),【中】听，耳朵。【阳】女宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Savaṇīya: {'def': '【形】悦耳的。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】悦耳的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Savera: {'def': '【形】与敌意连接的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】与敌意连接的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+vera] angry D.I,247. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savhaya: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+avhaya] called, named Dpvs 4, 7; Ap 109. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savibhattika: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+vibhatti+ka] (able) to be classified DhsA.134. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】包括一个分级的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】包括一个分级的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Savicāra: {'def': 'accompanied by investigation D.I,37 etc., in the description of the first Jhāna. See vicāra. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savidha: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. savidha] near; (nt.) neighbourhood Dāvs.IV,32; V,9. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savighāta: {'def': '【形】带来恼怒的。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】带来恼怒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+vighāta] bringing vexation Th.2, 352; ThA.242. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savijjuka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+vijju+ka] accompanied by lightning D.II,262. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savitakka: {'def': '【形】有寻的，有推理陪伴的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有寻的，有推理陪伴的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'accompanied by reasoning D.I,37 etc., in the formula of the first Jhāna. See vitakka. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saviññāṇa: {'def': 'possessed of consciousness, conscious, animate A.I,83; --ka the same A.I,132; DhA.I,6. -- See viññāṇaka. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saviññāṇaka: {'def': '【形】有生气的，有意识的。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有生气的，有意识的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Savupādāna: {'def': '=sa-upādāna (A.II,163): see upādāna. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Savyañjana: {'def': '【形】连同佐料的，连同好文学的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】连同佐料的，连同好文学的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+vyañjana] with the letters Vin.I,21; D.I,62; DA.I,176; Sn. p. 103; Vism.214. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saya: {'def': '=saka (?) one’s own J.VI,414 (=saka-raṭṭha C.). (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sayambhū: {'def': '【阳】造物主。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】造物主。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sayana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. śī] 1. lying down, sleeping Vism.26; PvA.80 (mañca°). -- 2. bed, couch Vin.I,57, 72; II,123; D.I,5, 7; A.I,132; J.II,88; V,110 (°ṁ attharāpeti to spread out a bed); Miln.243, 348; Nd¹ 372 (°sannidhi); Pv.I,11⁷ (kis°=kiṁ°); PvA.78. -- sayanakalaha a quarrel in the bedroom, a curtain-lecture J.III,20; sayanāsana bed & seat It.112; Dh.185, etc.: see senāsana. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】床，睡眠。 ~nighara, 【中】睡房。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. wī),【中】1睡眠(lying down, sleeping, mañcasayana)。2.床(bed, couch)。sayanighara,【中】睡房。D.2./I,65~6.︰“Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ uccāsayanamahāsayanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ-- (1)āsandiṁ (2)pallaṅkaṁ, (3)gonakaṁ (4)cittakaṁ (5)paṭikaṁ (6)paṭalikaṁ tūlikaṁ (6)vikatikaṁ (6)uddalomiṁ (7)ekantalomiṁ (8)kaṭṭissaṁ (9)koseyyaṁ (10)kuttakaṁ (11)hatthattharaṁ (12)assattharaṁ (13)rathattharaṁ (14)ajinappaveṇiṁ (15)kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇaṁ (16)sa-uttaracchadaṁ (17)ubhatolohitakūpadhānaṁ iti vā iti evarūpā uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.(鉴於有些沙门及婆罗门依靠信众供养的食物过活，却享用高且奢侈的床和椅，这即是：(1)长椅(超长椅子)；(2)底座雕刻；(3)长羊毛(床单)；(4)杂色的(床单)；(5)白羊毛(床单)；(6)以花镶边的羊毛(床单)；(7)以棉花充填的被子；(8)有刺绣的羊毛(床单)；(9)单面或双面有毛的羊毛(床单)；(10)镶有珠宝的床罩；(11)丝绸(床单)；(12)舞厅地毯；(13)象、马或马车的小地毯；(14)羚羊皮小地毯；(15)芭蕉鹿皮制的精选床罩；(16)上有红色布篷的床罩；(17)头脚有红色床垫的睡床──他戒除使用这些高且奢侈的床和椅。这也是他的戒行。) 15. āsandinti pamāṇātikkantāsanaṁ. Anuyuttā viharantīti idaṁ apekkhitvā pana sabbapadesu upayogavacanaṁ kataṁ. Pallaṅkoti pādesu vāḷarūpāni ṭhapetvā kato. Gonakoti dīghalomako mahākojavo, caturaṅgulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni. Cittakanti vānavicittaṁ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṁ. Paṭikāti uṇṇāmayo setattharaṇo. (DA.1./I,87.) Paṭalikāti ghanapupphako uṇṇāmayattharaṇo. Yo āmalakapattotipi vuccati. Tūlikāti tiṇṇaṁ tūlānaṁ aññatarapuṇṇā tūlikā. Vikatikāti sīhabyagghādirūpavicitro uṇṇāmayattharaṇo. Uddalomīti ubhayatodasaṁ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṁ, keci “ekato-uggatapupphan”ti vadanti. Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṁ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṁ. Keci “ubhato-uggatapupphan”ti vadanti. Kaṭṭissanti ratanaparisibbitaṁ koseyyakaṭṭissamayapaccattharaṇaṁ. Koseyyanti ratanaparisibbitameva kosiyasuttamayapaccattharaṇaṁ. Suddhakoseyyaṁ pana vaṭṭatīti Vinaye vuttaṁ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṁ pana “ṭhapetvā tūlikaṁ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni na vaṭṭantī”ti vuttaṁ. Kuttakanti soḷasannaṁ nāṭakitthīnaṁ ṭhatvā naccanayoggaṁ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṁ. Hatthattharaṁ assattharanti hatthi-assapiṭṭhīsu attharaṇa-attharakāyeva. Rathattharepi eseva nayo. Ajinappaveṇīti ajinacammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā (CS:p.1.84) paveṇī. Kadalīmigapavarapaccattharaṇanti kadalīmigacammaṁ nāma atthi, tena kataṁ pavarapaccattharaṇaṁ; uttamapaccattharaṇanti attho. Taṁ kira setavatthassa upari kadalīmigacammaṁ pattharitvā sibbetvā karonti. Sa-uttaracchadanti saha uttaracchadena, uparibaddhena rattavitānena saddhinti attho. Setavitānampi heṭṭhā akappiyapaccattharaṇe sati na vaṭṭati, asati pana vaṭṭati. Ubhatolohitakūpadhānanti sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti (DA.1./I,88.) mañcassa ubhatolohitakaṁ upadhānaṁ, etaṁ na kappati. Yaṁ pana ekameva upadhānaṁ ubhosu passesu rattaṁ vā hoti padumavaṇṇaṁ vā vicitraṁ vā, sace pamāṇayuttaṁ, vaṭṭati. Mahā-upadhānaṁ pana paṭikkhittaṁ. Alohitakāni dvepi vaṭṭantiyeva. Tato uttari labhitvā aññesaṁ dātabbāni. Dātuṁ asakkonto mañce tiriyaṁ attharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṁ datvā nipajjitumpi labhati. āsandī-ādīsu pana vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitabbaṁ. Vuttañhetaṁ-- “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āsandiyā pāde chinditvā paribhuñjituṁ, pallaṅkassa vāḷe bhinditvā paribhuñjituṁ, tūlikaṁ vijaṭetvā bimbohanaṁ kātuṁ, avasesaṁ bhummattharaṇaṁ kātun”ti (cūḷava.297).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sayanighara: {'def': '(nt.) a sleeping-room Vin.I,140 sq.; IV,160; J.I,433; III,275, 276. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sayatatta: {'def': 'at S.I,14 read saṁyatatta. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sayathā: {'def': '(cp. Sk. sayathā or tadyathā; see sa2. The usual P. form is seyyathā),【副】像，即(like, as)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Sk. sayathā or tadyathā; see sa². The usual P. form is seyyathā] like, as Th.1, 412. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sayati: {'def': '(si睡+a), 睡觉，躺下。【过】sayi。【现分】sayanta, sayamāna。【独】sayitvā。cf. Sayati (si睡+a), 睡觉，躺下。cf. supati(睡觉)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(si + a), 睡觉，躺下。【过】 sayi。【现分】sayanta, sayamāna。【独】 sayitvā。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [śī] to lie down: see seti. Caus. II. sayāpeti ibid. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [śri which is given in meaning sevā at Dhtp 289] to lean on; to be supported etc.: only in pp. sita, and in prep. cpd. nissayati. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sayañjāta: {'def': '【形】自生的，化生的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】自生的，化生的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sayaŋ: {'def': '【无】自己，独自。 ~kata,【形】自做的。 ~vara,【阳】自己的选择。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sayaṁ: {'def': '【无】自己，靠自己，独自。sayaṁkata,【形】自做的。sayaṁvara,【阳】自己的选择。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [see etym. under sa⁴] self, by oneself Vin.I,8; D.I,12; DA.I,175; Sn.57, 320, etc.; p. 57, 100, etc.; Mhvs 7, 63 (for f.). Also with ref. to several people, e. g. DhA.I,13.

--kata made by itself, spontaneous D.III,137 (loka); S.II,19 sq. (dukkha); Ud.69 sq. --jāta born from oneself, sprung up spontaneously J.I,325; II,129. --pabha radiating light from oneself, a kind of devas D.I,17; III,28 sq., 84 sq.; Sn.404; DA.I,110 --bhū self-dependent, an epithet of a Buddha Bu XIV.1 = J.I,39; Miln.214, 227, 236; Vism.234; SnA 106 (f. abstr. sayambhutā), 135. --vara self-choice J.V,426. --vasin self-controlled, independent Bu II.20=J.I,5; Dāvs.I,22. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sayha: {'def': '【形】可忍受的，能忍耐的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see sahati. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可忍受的，能忍耐的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sayita: {'def': '[pp. of seti] lying down J.I,338; V,438. sukha° lying in a good position, sleeping well, well-embedded (of seeds) A.III,404=D.II,354; Miln.255. sukha-sayitabhāva “having had a good sleep,” being well J.V,127. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sayāna: {'def': '【形】睡着的，躺下的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'is ppr. of sayati lying down (e. g. A.II,13 sq.): see seti. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】睡著的，躺下的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sayāpeti: {'def': '(sayati 的【使】), 使入眠，使躺下。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sayati 的【使】), 使入眠，使躺下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sayāpita: {'def': '[pp. of sayāpeti] made to lie down VbhA.11. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sayāpeti的【过分】) 已躺下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcalana: {'def': '【中】激动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】激动。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañcalati: {'def': '[saṁ+calati] to be unsteady or agitated Miln.117. Caus. °cāleti to shake Vin.III,127; J.V,434. -- pp. °calita. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+cal摇动+a), 使不稳定，摇动。【过】sañcali。【过分】sañcalita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + cal + a), 使不稳定，摇动。【过】 ~cali。【过分】 ~calita。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañcalita: {'def': '[pp. of sañcalati] shaken Miln.224 (a°). (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcara: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+car] passage, way, medium DA.I,289. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcarati: {'def': '[saṁ+carati] 1. to go about, to wander D.I,83. -- 2. to meet, unite, come together J.II,36 (of the noose of a snare). -- 3. to move, to rock J.I,265. -- 4. to pass J.I,491. -- Caus. °cāreti to cause to move about Miln.377, 385. -- Caus. II. °carāpeti to cause to go, to emit J.I,164; to make one’s mind dwell on Vism.187. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+car移动+a), 走动，游荡，移动，经常出入。【过】sañcari。【过分】sañcarita。【现分】sañcaranta。【独】sañcaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + car + a), 走动，游荡，移动，经常出入。【过】 ~cari。【过分】 ~carita。【现分】 ~caranta。【独】 ~ritvā。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañcaraṇa: {'def': '【中】漫步，徘徊。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】漫步，徘徊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+car] wandering about, meeting meeting-place J.I,163; IV,335; Miln.359. a° impassable Miln.217. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcaritta: {'def': '【中】带信息。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+caritar] 1. going backwards & forwards, acting as go-between Vin.III,137. -- 2. intercourse Miln.266. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】媒介，带资讯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcaya: {'def': '【阳】积聚，量。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】积聚，量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+ci] accumulation, quantity Sn.697; It.17 (aṭṭhi°); Miln.220. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcetanika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sañcetanā] intentional Vin.III,112; M.III,207; A.V,292 sq.; a° M.I,377. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcetanā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+cetanā] thought, cogitation, perception, intention A.II,159 (atta°, para°); D.III,231 (id.); S.II,11, 40, 99 (mano°); II,39 sq., 247; III,60, 227 sq.; Vbh.285; Dhs.70, 126. Sixfold (i. e. the 6 fold sensory perception, rūpa°, sadda°, etc.): D.II,309; III,244; Ps.I,136. Threefold (viz. kāya°, vacī°, mano°): Vism.341, 530; VbhA.144, 145. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】认识，意图。 ~tanika, 【形】企图的。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】认识，意图。sañcetanika,【形】企图的。sañcetanika kamma﹐故作业，故思业，即故意造作之业。MA.9./I,209.︰Manosañcetanāti cetanā eva vuccati.(意思(心思)︰称为‘思’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcetayitatta: {'def': '【中】反应(reflection)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) reflection Dhs.5, 72. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañceteti: {'def': '(saṁ+cit想+e), 思考，想出(办法)。【过】Sañcetesi。【独】Sañcetetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + cit + e), 思考，想出（办法）。【过】 ~esi。【独】 ~tetvā。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see °cinteti. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañchanna: {'def': '[saṁ+channa¹] covered (with= --°) M.I,124; Th.1, 13; J.I,201; SnA 91 (°patta full of leaves; puppha° of flowers). Often in cpd. paduma° covered with lotuses (of ponds) Pv.II,1²⁰; II,12²; Vv 44¹; J.I,222; V,337. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sañchādeti的【过分】), 已覆盖，已充满。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañchavin: {'def': 'M.II,217, 259. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañchindati: {'def': '(saṁ+chid切断+ṁ-a), 切(割、削)，破坏。【过】sañchindi。【过分】sañchinna。【独】sañchinditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+chindati] to cut, destroy M.III,275 (Pot. °chindeyya); A.II,33=S.III,85 (ger. °chinditvā). -- pp. sañchinna. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + chid + ŋ-a), 切（割、削），破坏。【过】 ~ndi。【过分】~chinna。【独】 ~nditvā。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañchinna: {'def': '[pp. of sañchindati] Vin.I,255 (of the kaṭhina, with samaṇḍalīkata “hemmed”). Also in cpd. °patta “with leaves destroyed” is Nd² reading at Sn.44 (where T. ed. & SnA 91 read saṁsīna), as well as at Sn.64 (in similar context, where T. ed. reads sañchinna). The latter passage is expl^d (Nd² 625) as “bahula-pattapalāsa saṇḍa-cchāya,” i. e. having thick & dense foliage. The same meaning is attached to sañchinna-patta at VvA.288 (with v. l. saṁsīna!), thus evidently in sense of sañchanna. The C. on Sn.64 (viz. SnA 117) takes it as sañchanna in introductory story. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañchādeti: {'def': '(saṁ+chad盖+e), 覆盖，用茅草覆盖屋顶。【过】sañchādesi。【过分】sañchādita。【独】sañchādetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + chad + e), 覆盖，用茅草覆盖屋顶。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~dita。【独】 ~detvā。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañchādita: {'def': '[pp. of sañchādeti] covered PvA.157. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcicca: {'def': '【独】有意图，故意地，有差别地。asañcicca, 无意图。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [ger. of saṁ+cinteti; ch. BSk. sañcintya Divy 494] discriminately, purposely, with intention Vin.II,76; III,71, 112; IV,149, 290; D.III,133; Kvu 593; Miln.380; PvA.103. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】有意图，故意地，有差别地。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañcinana: {'def': '【中】积聚。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】积聚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcinteti: {'def': '(& °ceteti) [saṁ+cinteti] to think, find out, plan, devise means D.II,180, 245 (aor. samacintesuṁ); Th.1, 1103 (Pot. °cintaye); J.III,438 (aor. samacetayi). (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& Sañceteti,(saṁ+cinteti) 思考、计划(to think, find out, plan, devise means )。【过】samacintesuṁ, samacetayi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcināti: {'def': '(& saṁcayati) [saṁ+cināti] to accumulate; ppr. °cayanto Mhvs 21, 4; aor. cini° PvA.202 (puññaṁ), 279 (pl. °cinimha). -- pp. sañcita. -- Cp. abhi°. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ci+nā), 累积。【过】sañcini。【现分】sañcinanta。【独】sañcinitvā。sañcctanika kamma﹐故作业，累积的过去的业。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ci + nā), 累积。【过】 ~cini。【现分】 ~nanta。【独】 ~nitvā。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañcita: {'def': '(sañcināti 的【过分】)积聚(accumulated, filled (with))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sañcināti] accumulated, filled (with) J.VI,249; ThA.282; Sdhp.319. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sañcināti 的【过分】)。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañciṇṇa: {'def': '(Sañcināti的【过分】), 已累积，已练习。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcodita: {'def': '[saṁ+codita] instigated, excited PvA.5, 68, 171, 213; ThA.207. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sañcodeti 的【过分】), 已教唆，已兴奋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sañcodeti 的【过分】), 已教唆，已兴奋。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañcopana: {'def': '【中】移动，换位。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】移动，换位。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [saṁ+copana] touching, handling Vin.III,121 (ā); IV,214 (a) (=parāmasanan nāma ito c’ito ca). (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcopati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. copati, as a(/pac in Mhbh. We should expect copeti in Pāli, fr. cup to stir] to move, to stir; a misunderstood term. Found in aor. samacopi (so read for T. samadhosi & v. l. samañcopi) mañcake “he stirred fr. his bed” S.III,120, 125; and sañcopa (pret.) J.V,340 (v. l. for T. sañcesuṁ āsanā; C. expl^s as “caliṁsu”). (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcuṇṇa: {'def': '[saṁ+cuṇṇa] crushed, shattered Bu II.170= J.I,26. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+cuṇṇa), 压破(crushed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcuṇṇeti: {'def': '[saṁ+cuṇṇeti] to crush J.II,210, 387 (aor. °esi); III,175 (Pot. °eyya), 176 (ger. °etvā). -- pp. °cuṇṇita. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + cuṇṇ + e), 压破，搽粉于。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ṇita。【独】 ~ṇetvā。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+cuṇṇ+e), 压破(crushed)。【过】sañcuṇṇesi。【过分】sañcuṇṇita。【独】sañcuṇṇetvā。【义】sañcuṇṇeyya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcuṇṇita: {'def': '[pp. of sañcuṇṇeti] crushed J.II,41; Miln.188; Vism.259. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcāra: {'def': '【阳】通道，动作，漫游。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】通道，动作，漫游。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+cāra] 1. going, movement, passing through Sdhp.244. -- 2. passages entrance, road J.I,409; II,70, 122. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañcāraṇa: {'def': '【中】引起移动，引起行动。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】引起移动，引起行动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañcāreti: {'def': '(sañcarati 的【使】), 使走来走去。【过】sañcāresi。【过分】sañcārita。【独】sañcāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sañcarati 的【使】), 使走来走去。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】 ~retvā。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañjagghati: {'def': '(saṁ+jaggh+a), 笑，开玩笑。【过】sañjagghi。【独】sañjagghitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+jagghati] to joke, to jest D.I,91; A.IV,55, 343; DA.I,256. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + jaggh + a), 笑，开玩笑。【过】 ~ghi。【独】 ~ghitvā。【动名】 ~ghana。【中】(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañjambhari: {'def': 'in °ṁ karoti is not clear in derⁿ & meaning; perhaps “to tease, abuse,” see D.I,189 (°riyaṁ); A.I,187; S.II,282. Probably fr. bhṛ (Intensive jarbhṛta Vedic!) as *jarbhari. See on derⁿ Konow, J.P.T.S. 1909, 42; Kern, Toev. II.69. The C. on S.II,282 (K.S. II.203) expl^s as “sambharitaṁ nirantaraṁ phuṭaṁ akaṁsu, upari vijjhiṁsū ti,” i. e. continually touching (or nudging) (phuṭa=phuṭṭha or phoṭita). (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjanana: {'def': '(nt.) producing; f. °ī progenetrix (identical with taṇhā) Dhs.1059; DhsA.363. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】制造。【形】产生的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】制造。【形】产生的。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañjanati: {'def': '[saṁ+janati] to be born; only in Caus. °janeti to cause, produce; realize Pug.16; Sdhp.564 (ger. °janayitvāna). -- pp. sañjāta. See also Pass. saṁjāyati. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjanetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. sañjaneti] one who produces S.I,191; III,66. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjaneti: {'def': '(saṁ+jan +e), 生产，生。【过】sañjanesi。【过分】sañjanita。【独】sañjanetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + jan + e), 生产，生。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~janita。【独】~netvā。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sañjati: {'def': 'is the P. correspondent of sajati¹ (sṛj), but Sk. sañj=sajjati (to hang on, cling), which at Dhtp 67 & 397 def^d as saṅga. The Dhtp (64) & Dhtm (82) take sañj in all meanings of āliṅgana (=sajati²), vissagga (=sajati¹), & nimmāna (=sajjeti). (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjhā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. sandhyā] evening; only in cpds. °ātapa evening sun VvA.4, 12; °ghana evening cloud ThA.146 (Ap. V,44); Dāvs.V,60. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】傍晚。 ~ghaṇa, 【阳】傍晚的云。 ~tapa, 【阳】傍晚的太阳。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】傍晚。sañjhāghaṇa,【阳】傍晚的云。sañjhātapa,【阳】傍晚的太阳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañjitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. sajati¹, cp. sañjati] creator, one who assigns to each his station D.I,18, 221; M.I,327; DA.I,111 (v. l. sajjitar, cp. Sk. sraṣṭar). (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjiva: {'def': 'm. [BSk.〃] 等活 [八大地獄の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sañjiṇṇa: {'def': '[saṁ+jiṇṇa] decayed J.I,503 (v. l.). (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjādiya: {'def': 'a grove, wood J.V,417, 421 (v. l sañcāriya). (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjānana: {'def': '【中】承认，感知。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. sañjānāti] knowing, perceiving, recognition Miln.61; DA.I,211; characteristic, that by which one is distinguished DhsA.321. As f. at Dhs.4; DhsA.110, 140 (trslⁿ Expos. 185: “the act of perceiving by noting”). (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjānetar: {'def': 'at S.III,66 read sañjanetā. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjānita: {'def': '(sañjānāti的【过分】), 已辨认出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañjānitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sañjānita, pp. Caus. of sañjānāti] the state of having perceived Dhs.4. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjānāti: {'def': '(saŋ + ñā + nā), 认出，知道，意识到。【过】 ~jāni。【独】~janitvā。【现分】 ~jānanta。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+jānāti] 1. to recognize, perceive, know, to be aware of Vin.III,112; D.II,12; M.I,111, 473; S.III,87; A.V,46, 60, 63; J.I,135; IV,194; ThA.110. -- 2. to think, to suppose J.II,98. -- 3. to call, name, nickname D.I,93; J.I,148. -- Aor. sañjāni DA.I,261; ger. saññāya J.I,187; II,98; saññatvā M.I,1; and sañjānitvā J.I,352. -- Caus. saññāpeti (q. v.). -- pp. saññāta. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ一起+ñā知+nā), 认出(recognize)，知道(to be aware of)，意识到(to know)。「认出(sañjānāti)故称为「想」(Saññā)」(M.43./I,292.)【过】sañjāni(sañjananī pl.)。【独】sañjanitvā。【现分】sañjānanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañjāta: {'def': '(sañjāyati 的【过分】), 已出生，已兴起。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sañjāyati 的【过分】), 已出生，已兴起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [sa²+jāta] of the same origin (con-gener) J.IV,134. Cp. sajāti. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of sañjanati] having become, produced, arisen Dhs.1035 (+bhūta & other syn.). °- full of, grown into, being in a state of Sn.53 (°khandha=susaṇṭhita° SnA 103); VvA.312, 318 (°gārava full of respect), 324 (°pasāda). (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sañjāti: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+jāti] birth, origin; outcome; produce D.I,227; II,305. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】生，结果，起源。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+jāti),【阴】和合产生，结果，起源(birth, origin; outcome; produce)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañjāyati: {'def': '[saṁ+jāyati, cp. sañjanati] to be born or produced D.I,220; J.II,97; aor. sañjāyi D.II,209; Vin.I,32; ppr. °jāyamāna J.V,384. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + jan + ya), 出生，生产。【过】 ~jayi。【过分】 sañjāta。【现分】 ~yamāna。【独】 ~yitvā。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+jan生+ya), 出生，生产。【过】sañjayi。【过分】sañjāta。【现分】sañjāyamāna。【独】sañjāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañjīva: {'def': '复活地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(‹saṁ+jīv活命)﹐【阳】等活地狱，八大地狱之一。「等活」为复活之意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañjīvana: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁ+jīv] reviving ThA.181 (Ap. V, 23: putta°). (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】复活的。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹saṁ+jīv活命),【形】复活的(reviving ThA 181)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sañña: {'def': '【阴】想，感觉，知觉，标志，名字，承认，手势。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】想蕴。 ~paka, 【阳】使明白者。 ~pana, 【中】令人信服，公布。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saññatta: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [abstr. formation fr. saññā] the state of being a saññā, perceptibility S.III,87. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(= saññāpita), 【过分】已劝诱，已说服，已使信服。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [pp. of saññāpeti] induced, talked over Sn.303, 308 (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(= saññāpita),【过分】已劝诱，已说服，已使信服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saññatti: {'def': '【阴】情报，和解。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. saññāpeti] 1. informing, convincing A.I,75; S.I,199; Vin.II,98, 199, 307; J.III,402. -- 2. appeasing, pacification M.I,320. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】情报，和解。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saññin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saññā] (f. saññinī) conscious, being aware of (-°), perceiving, having perception D.I,31, 180; III,49, 111, 140, 260; S.I,62; A.II,34, 48, 50; III,35; IV,427; Dh.253; Nd¹ 97, 138. -- ālokasaññin having a clear perception D.I,71; A.II,211; V,207; Sum I.211; nānatta° conscious of diversity A.IV,39 sq.; paṭhavīsaññin conscious of the earth (kasiṇa), in samādhi A.V,8 sq.; paṭhavisaññiniyo (fem. plur.), having a worldly mind D.II,139; asubhasaññin perceiving the corruption of the world It.93; vihiṁsasaññin conscious of the trouble Vin.I,7; nevasaññī-nâsaññin neither conscious nor unconscious D.III,111; A.II,34; Nd¹ 97, 138; It.90; DA.I,119. Cp. vi°. -- In composition saññi°, e. g. °gabbha animate production D.I,54; DA.I,163. (Page 671)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññita: {'def': '【形】所谓的，命名为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】所谓的，命名为。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[=saññāta; pp. of sañjānāti] so-called, named, so-to-speak Mhvs 7, 45; PvA.135; Sdhp.72, 461. See also aya under niraya. (Page 671)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññojana: {'def': '结, 缚, 使;结缚;系缚;束缚', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Saññ°: {'def': 'is frequent spelling for saṁy° (in saṁyojana=saññojana e. g.), q. v. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññā: {'def': '想(PS: 想蕴 saññā-kkhandha)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+jñā] (pl. saññāyo and saññā -- e. g. M.I,108) 1. sense, consciousness, perception, being the third khandha Vin.I,13; M.I,300; S.III,3 sq.; Dhs.40, 58, 61, 113; VbhA.42. -- 2. sense, perception, discernment, recognition, assimilation of sensations, awareness M.I,293; A.III,443 (nibbāna°); S.III,87; Sn.732 (saññāya uparodhanā dukkhakkhayo hoti; expl^d as “kāmasaññā” SnA); Miln.61; Dhs.4; DhsA.110, 200 (rūpa° perception of material qualities). -- 3. consciousness D.I,180 sq.; M.I,108; Vbh.369 (nānatta° c. of diversity: see nānatta); Miln.159; J.IV,391; is previous to ñāṇa D.I,185; a constituent part of nāma S.II,3, cp. Sn.779; according to later teaching differs from viññāṇa and paññā only as a child’s perceiving differs from (a) an adult’s, (b) an expert’s Vism.436 sq.; Dhs. trslⁿ 7 n. 2, 17 n. 2. --nevasaññā-nâsaññā neither consciousness nor unconsciousness D.III,224, 262 sq.; M.I,41, 160; II,255; III,28, 44; Ps.I,36; Dhs.268, 582, 1417; Kvu 202; Nett 26, 29; Vism.571. -- 4. conception, idea, notion D.I,28; III,289 (cp. Dial. III,263: “concept rather than percept”); M.III,104; S.I,107; Sn.802, 841; J.I,368 (ambaphala saññāya in the notion or imagining of mango fruit); Vism.112 (rūpa° & aṭṭhika°). saññaṁ karoti to imagine, to think J.II,71; to take notice, to mind J.I,117. -- 5. sign, gesture token, mark J.I,287; II,18; paṇṇa° a mark of leaves J.I,153; rajjusaññā a rope used as a mark, a guiding rope, J.I,287; rukkha-saññaṁ pabbata-saññaṁ karonto, using trees and hills as guiding marks J.IV,91; saññaṁ dadāti to give the sign (with the whip, for the horse to start) J.VI,302. -- 6. saññā is twofold, paṭighasamphassajā and adhivacanasamphassajā i. e. sense impression and recognition (impression of something similar, “association by similarity,” as when a seen person calls up some one we know), Vbh.6; VbhA.19 sq.; threefold, rūpasaññā, paṭighasaññā, and nānattasaññā A.II,184; S.II,211; cp. Sn.535; or kāma°, vyāpāda°, vihiṁsā° (as nānatta°) Vbh.369, cp. VbhA.499; fivefold (pañca vimutti-paripācaniyā saññā); anicca°, anicce dukkha°, dukkhe anatta°, pahāna°, virāga° D.III,243, cp. A.III,334; there are six perceptions of rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba, and dhamma, D.II,309; S.III,60; the sevenfold perception, anicca-, anatta-, asubha-, ādīnava-, pahāna-, virāga-, and nirodha-saññā, D.II,79; cp. A.III,79; the tenfold perception, asubha-, maraṇa-, āhāre paṭikkūla-, sabbaloke anabhirata-, anicca-, anicce dukkha-, dukkhe anatta-, pahāna-, virāga-, nirodha-saññā A.V,105; the one perception, āhāre paṭikkūlasaññā, Cpd. 21. -- 7. See further (unclassified refs.): D.I,180; II,277 (papañca°); III,33, 223; S.II,143; A.II,17; IV,312; Nd¹ 193, 207; Nett 27; Vism.111, 437, 461 sq. (in detail); VbhA.20 (pañca-dvārikā), 34; VvA.110; and on term Cpd. 40, 42.

--gata perceptible, the world of sense M.I,38. --bhava conscious existence Vism.572; VbhA.183. --maya= arūpin M.I,410 (opp. manomaya=rūpin). --vedayitanirodha cessation of consciousness and sensation M.I,160, 301; III,45; A.I,41; Kvu 202; S.II,212. --viratta free from consciousness, an Arahant, Sn.847. --vimokkha emancipation from consciousness Sn.1071 sq.; Miln.159=Vin.V,116. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ一起+ ñā(梵jñā)知),【阴】感觉(sense)，知觉(perception)，标志(mark)，命名(name)，承认(recognition)，作手势(gesture)，想(直译：一起知，perception)。S.22.79./III,87.(cf. M.43./I,293.)︰“Kiñca, bhikkhave, saññaṁ vadetha? Sañjānātīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘saññā’ti vuccati. Kiñca sañjānāti? Nīlampi sañjānāti, pītakampi sañjānāti, lohitakampi sañjānāti, odātampi sañjānāti. Sañjānātīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘saññā’ti vuccati.(诸比丘！你们如何说‘想’(saññaṁ)？‘认知’(sañjānāti)，诸比丘！由於它，它被叫做想(saññā)。何者是认知？也认知蓝(青)色，也认知黄色，也认知红色，也认知白色。‘认知’，诸比丘！由於它，它被叫做‘想’。)。saññākkhandha,【阳】想蕴。saññāpaka,【阳】使明白者。saññāpana,【中】令人信服，公布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saññācikā: {'def': '﹐【阴】自己乞求。Samantapāsādikā(一切欢喜) (Sp.Pārā.III,567)：saññācikā nāma sayaṁ pavattitayācanā vuccati, tasmā “saññācikāyā”ti attano yācanāyāti vuttaṁ hoti(自己乞求：称为自己回转乞求；为自己乞求：为自己乞求之称)。saññācikāya﹐saṁyācikāya(ṁy→ññ)﹐【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saññāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saññāpeti] convincing J.V,462. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññāpeti: {'def': '(saṁ+ñā +āpe) 公布，使信服。【过】saññāpesi。【过分】saññāpita。【独】saññāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ñā + āpe) 公布，使信服。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of sañjānāti] 1. to make known, to teach J.I,344; Miln.45. -- 2. to remonstrate with, gain over, convince D.I,236; M.I,397; A.I,75; S.IV,313; Vin.I,10; II,197; Miln.316. -- 3. to appease, conciliate J.I,479; PvA.16. Also saññapeti J.I,26, etc. -- inf. saññattuṁ Sn.597. -- pp. saññatta. -- At J.I,408 read saññāpāpetvā (instead of saññaṁ pāpetvā), or simply saññāpetvā, like the parallel text at Ud.17. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññāta: {'def': '[pp. of sañjānāti] skilled M.I,396. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññāvant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saññā] having perception A.II,215= Dhs.1003. (Page 671)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññāṇa: {'def': '【中】标志，告示。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】标志，告示。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic sañjñāna] 1. perception, knowledge VvA.110. -- 2. token, mark J.IV,301; DA.I,46; Vism.244. -- 3. monument Mhvs 19, 35. (Page 670)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saññī: {'def': '(Saññin),【形】【阳】有意识的，有想的，知道的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有意识的，有感知的，知道的。(p314)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saññīvāda: {'def': '[saññin+vāda] name of a school maintaining conscious existence after death D.I,31; DA.I,119; Mhbv 110. (Page 671)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saŋharati: {'def': '(saŋ + har + a), 收集，接合，折叠起来。【过】 ~hari。【过分】saŋhaṭa, ~harita。【现分】 ~ranta。【独】 ~ritvā。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋharaṇa: {'def': '【中】聚集，折叠。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋhata: {'def': '【形】结实的，紧密的。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋhaṭa: {'def': '(saŋharati 的【过分】)。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋhita: {'def': '【形】装备的，持有的。 ~tā, 【阴】连接，语调的和谐。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋhāra: {'def': '【阳】删节，编辑。 ~ka, 【形】接合的。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋhārima: {'def': '【形】活动的。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋrakkhanā: {'def': '【阴】保卫，保护。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋrakkhati: {'def': '(saŋ + rakkh + a), 保卫，防止。【过】 ~kkhi。【过分】 ~khita。【独】 ~khitvā。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsagga: {'def': '【阳】连络，结交。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsandati: {'def': '(saŋ + sand + a), 适合，同意，一起跑。【过】 ~sandi。【过分】~dita。【独】 ~ditvā。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsappana: {'def': '【中】扭动，挣扎。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsappati: {'def': '(saŋ + sap + a), 向前爬，爬行，慢慢地移动。【过】 ~ppi。【独】~pitvā。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsarati: {'def': '(saŋ + sar + a), 不断地到处移动，轮回。【过】 ~sari。【过分】~sarita。【独】 ~ritvā。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsaraṇa: {'def': '【中】到处移动，徘徊。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsatta: {'def': '【过分】已附着，已执着。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsaya: {'def': '【阳】疑惑。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsaṭṭha: {'def': '【过分】已和…混合，已参加，已结交。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsedaja: {'def': '【形】湿生的。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋseva: {'def': '【阳】 saŋsevanā, 【阴】结交。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsevati: {'def': '(saŋ + sev + a), 结交，参加。【过】 ~sevi。【过分】 ~vita。【现分】 ~vamāna。【独】 ~vitvā。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsevī: {'def': '【形】结交的人。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsibbita: {'def': '(saŋsibbati 的【过分】), 已缝纫，已交织。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsiddhi: {'def': '【阴】成功。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsijjhati: {'def': '(saŋ + siddh + ya), 被实现，成功, 【过】 ~jjhi。【过分】 ~siddha。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsita: {'def': '(saŋsati 的【过分】), 已期望，已盼望。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsuddha: {'def': '【过分】已纯粹。 ~gahaṇika, 【形】纯净的血统。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsuddhi: {'def': '【阴】纯净。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsādeti: {'def': '(saŋ + sad + e), 置在一边，延期。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsāra: {'def': '【阳】继续旅行，轮回。 ~cakka, 【中】轮回的轮子。 ~dukkha, 【中】轮回的苦。 ~sāgara, 【阳】轮回的大海。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsīdana: {'def': '【中】沉没。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsīdati: {'def': '(saŋ + sad + a), 下沉，灰心，变弱。【过】 saŋsīdi。【现分】~damāna。【独】 ~sīditvā。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsīna: {'def': '【过分】已下跌。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋsūcaka: {'def': '【形】指出的。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvacchara: {'def': '【中】年。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvaddha: {'def': '参考 Saŋvaḍḍha。 ~na, 【中】生长，培养，成长。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvara: {'def': '【阳】抑制。 ~ṇa, 【中】限制，障碍，关闭。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvarati: {'def': '(saŋ + var + a), 抑制，关上，覆盖。【过】 ~vari。【过分】saŋvuta。【独】 ~varitvā。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvarī: {'def': '【阴】夜晚。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvasati: {'def': '(saŋ + vas + a), 交往，共处，同居。【过】 ~vasi。【过分】~vasita。【独】 ~vasitvā。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvattanika: {'def': '【形】有益的，涉及的。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvattati: {'def': '(saŋ + vat + a), 存在，导致。【过】 ~vatti。【过分】 ~vattita。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvatteti: {'def': '(saŋvattati 的【使】), 使继续。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~vattita。【独】 ~tetvā。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvaḍḍhati: {'def': '(saŋ + vaḍḍh + a), 生长，增加。【过】 ~ḍḍhi。【现分】~ḍhamāna。【独】 ~ḍhitvā。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvaṇṇeti: {'def': '(saŋ + vaṇṇ + e), 说明，批评，称赞。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ṇita。【潜】 ~ṇetabba。【独】 ~ṇetvā。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvaṇṇā: {'def': '【阴】说明，解释，赞美。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvaṭṭakappa: {'def': '【阳】世界的毁灭。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvaṭṭana: {'def': '【中】旋转，解散。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvaṭṭati: {'def': '(saŋ + vat + a), 被溶解。【过】 ~ṭṭi。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvega: {'def': '【阳】焦虑，激动，宗教性的情绪。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvejana: {'def': '【中】情绪的因素，激动的因素。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvejaniya: {'def': '【形】易于引起情绪的，易于引起焦虑的。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvejeti: {'def': '(saŋ + vij + e), 使情绪，使激动。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【独】~jetvā。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvibhajana: {'def': '【中】 saŋvibhāga, 【阳】分，分享。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvibhajati: {'def': '(saŋ + vi + bhaj + a), 分开，分享。【过】 ~bhaji。【过分】 ~jita。~vibhatta。【独】 ~vibhajja, ~jitvā。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvibhatta: {'def': '【过分】已分好，已安排。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvibhāgī: {'def': '【阳】慷慨，大方，豪爽。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvidahana: {'def': '【中】安排，下令。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvidahati: {'def': '(saŋ + vi + dhā + a), 安排，下令，准备。【过】 ~dahi。【过分】~vihita。【独】 ~dahitvā。【现分】 ~dahamāna。【潜】 ~hitabba。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvidhāna: {'def': '【中】见 Saŋvidahana。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvidhātuŋ: {'def': '(saŋvidahati 的【不】), 要安排，要下令。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvidhāya: {'def': '(saŋvidahati 的【独】), 安排了。 ~ka, 【形】安排的人，处理的人。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvihita: {'def': '(saŋvidahati 的【过分】)。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvijjati: {'def': '(saŋ + vid + ya), 被发现，存在，被激动，被移动。【过】 ~jji。【现分】 ~jamāna。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvuta: {'def': '(saŋvarati 的【过分】)。 ~tindriya, 【形】已控制了五官的。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋvāsa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 同房。 2. 亲密。 3. 性交。 ~ka, 【形】同居的，共处一室的。(p337)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyama: {'def': '【阳】 saŋyamana, 【中】抑制，克己，节制。 ~mī, 【阳】隐遁者，抑制五官的人。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyameti: {'def': '(saŋ + yam + e), 抑制，练习克己。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~mita。【现分】 ~menta。【独】 ~metvā。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyata: {'def': '【形】抑制，自制（克制自己）。 ~atta, 【形】抑制心意的。 ~cārī,【形】自制而住的。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyoga: {'def': '【阳】束缚，联盟，协会，脚镣，元音复合。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyojana: {'def': '【中】连接，束缚，桎梏。 ~niya, 【形】对桎梏有用的。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyojeti: {'def': '(saŋ + yuj + e), 参加，结合，绑。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~jenta, 【独】 ~jetvā。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyujjati: {'def': '(saŋ + yij + ya), 被联合，被连接。【过】 ~yujji。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saŋyūhati: {'def': '(saŋ + ūh + a), 形成一块，形成一团，形成一堆。【过】 ~hi。【过分】 saŋyūḷha。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saḷāyatana: {'def': '(=chaḷāyatana﹐cha-āyatana),【中】六处(眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意)。kāyaṁ paṭicca salāyatanikaṁ jīvitapaccayā, 身六处命存(依於生命的六处之身)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ṣaḍ˚ for which ordinarily chal˚: see cha] the six organs of sense and the six objects -- viz., eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind; forms, sounds, odouis, tastes, tangible things, ideas; occupying the fourth place in the Paṭiccasamuppāda D ii.32; M i.52; A i.176; S ii.3; Vin i.1; Vism.529, 562 sq., 671; VbhA.174, 176 sq., 319. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】六处（即：眼，耳，鼻，舌，身和意）。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saṁ-: {'def': '﹐【字首】共，集，合，正，同时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁhanana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁhanati] joining together, closing D.I,11; J.VI,65. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁhanati: {'def': '& saṁhanti [saṁ+han] 1. to join together, reach to J.V,372. -- 2. to suppress, allay, destroy A.IV,437 (kaṇḍuṁ). -- pp. saṁhata. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁhara: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+hṛ] collecting; dus° hard to collect Vin.III,148; J.IV,36 (here as dussaṅghara, on which see Kern, Toev. I.121). (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁharati: {'def': '[saṁ+harati] 1. to collect, fold up Vin.I,46; II,117, 150; M.III,169; J.I,66, 422; Dāvs.IV,12; PvA.73. -- 2. to draw together Vin.II,217. -- 3. to gather up, take up SnA 369 (rūpaṁ). -- 4. to heap up Pv IV.14 (saṁharimha=sañcinimha PvA.279). --asaṁhāriya (grd.) which cannot be destroyed (see also saṁhīra) S.V,219. ‹-› Caus. II. °harāpeti to cause to collect, to make gather or grow Vin.IV,259 (lomāni), 260 (id.). -- Pass. saṁhīrati (q. v.). -- pp. saṁhata. Cp. upa°. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+har拿+a), 收集，接合，折叠起来。【过】saṁhari。【过分】saṁhaṭa, saṁharita。【现分】saṁharanta﹐saṁharamāna。【独】saṁharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁharaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁharati] collecting, gathering Dāvs.V,33. Cp. upa° & saṅgharaṇa. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】聚集，折叠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁharāpeti: {'def': '【使】被剃除。saṁharāpeyya, 3s.opt.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁhasati: {'def': '[san+hasati] to laugh with M.II,223. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁhata: {'def': '² [pp. of saṁ+hṛ] DA.I,280; see vi°. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (pp. of saṁ+han),【形】结实的，紧密的(firm, compact)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of saṁ+han] firm, compact Miln.416; Sdhp.388. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (pp. of saṁ+hr), 已移动，已破坏(removed, destroyed, 同visaṁhata)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁhaṭa: {'def': '(saṁharati 的【过分】) 已收集，已接合，已折叠起来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁhita: {'def': '[pp. of sandahati] connected, equipped with, possessed of D.I,5; M.II,202; S.I,103; Dh.101 (gāthā anattha-pada°). Often as attha° endowed with profit, bringing advantage, profitable D.I,189; S.II,223; IV,330; V,417; A.III,196 sq.; V,81; Sn.722. Cp. upa°. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of sandahati具有、伴随‹ saṁ+dhā给),【形】装备的，持有的。saṁhitā,【阴】连接，语调的和谐。anatthasaṁhito, 不具利益。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁhāni: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+hāni] shrinking, decrease, dwindling away D.II,305=M.I,49=S.II,2=Dhs.644; DhsA.328. Cp. parihāni. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ-hāni( sk.〃√hā杀 ), 【阴】损减、减退。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁhāra: {'def': '【阳】删节，编辑。saṁhāraka,【形】接合的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+hṛ] abridgment, compilation PvA.114. Cp. upa°. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁhāraka: {'def': '[saṁ+hāra+ka] drawing together, a collector S.II,185=It.17. sabba° a kind of mixed perfume J.VI,336. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁhārima: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁ+hṛ] movable Vism.124; Sn.28, 321. a° Vin.IV,272. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】活动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁhīra: {'def': '(& saṁhāriya) [grd. of saṁharati] that which can be restrained, conquerable Th.1, 1248; J.V,81. a° immovable, unconquerable S.I,193; Vin.II,96; A.IV,141 sq.; Th.1, 649; Sn.1149; J.IV,283. See also asaṁhāriya. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁhīrati: {'def': '[Pass. of saṁharati] to be drawn away or caught in (Loc.) M.III,188 sq. (paccuppannesu dhammesu); DhsA.420 (id.); J.III,333. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁhīyati: {'def': 'see sandhīyati. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁkilesa: {'def': '﹐【阳】烦恼，污染(impurity, defilement, corruption, sinfulness)。【反】：vodāna【中】明净。【反】：visuddhi【阴】清净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁkilissati: {'def': '(saṁ+kilissati, cp. BSk. Saṅkliwyati) 烦恼，污染(to become soiled or impure)。【过分】saṁkiliṭṭha。【使】saṁkileseti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁkiliṭṭha: {'def': '(saṁkilissati的【过分】), 烦恼、污染(stained, tarnished, impure)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁnyāsin: {'def': '(梵)﹐遁世者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁrakkhanā: {'def': '【阴】保卫，保护。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁrakkhati: {'def': '[saṁ+rakkhati] to guard, ward off Sdhp.364. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+rakkh保护+a), 保卫，防止。【过】saṁrakkhi。【过分】saṁrakkhita。【独】saṁrakkhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁrambha: {'def': '[saṁ+*rambha, fr. rabh, as in rabhasa (q. v.)] impetuosity, rage Dāvs.IV,34. This is the Sanskritic form for the usual P. sārambha. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁroceti: {'def': '(saṁ+roceti), 欢喜(to find pleasure in, only in aor.(poetical) samarocayi Sn.290, 306, 405; J.IV,471.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+roceti] to find pleasure in, only in aor. (poetical) samarocayi Sn.290, 306, 405; J.IV,471. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁrāga: {'def': '[saṁ+rāga] passion J.IV,22. Cp. sārāga. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁrūhati: {'def': '[saṁ+rūhati] to grow J.IV,429 (=vaḍḍhati). (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁrūḷha: {'def': '[pp. of saṁrūhati] grown together, healed J.III,216; V,344. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsad: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+sad] session, assembly; Loc. saṁsati J.III,493 (=parisamajjhe C.), 495 (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsaddati: {'def': '[saṁ+śabd] to sound, in def. of root kitt at Dhtp 579; Dhtm 812. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsagga: {'def': '【阳】连络，结交。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+sṛj] contact, connection, association Vin.III,120; A.III,293 sq. (°ārāmatā); IV,87 sq., 331; It.70; J.I,376; IV,57; Miln.386; Nd² 137; VbhA.340 (an-anulomika°); PvA.5 (pāpamitta°). -- Two kinds of contact at Nd² 659: by sight (dassana°) and by hearing (savaṇa°). -- pada° contact of two words, “sandhi” Nd¹ 139; Nd² 137 (for iti); SnA 28. --a° S.II,202; Miln.344. --°jāta one who has come into contact Sn.36. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsandanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁsandati] 1. (lit.) coming together J.VI,414 (v. l. for T. saṁsandita). -- 2. (fig.) import, application, reference, conclusion (lit. “flowing together”) Tikp 264. opamma° application of a simile, “tertium comparationis” Vism.326; DA.I,127. diṭṭha° (pucchā) a question with reference to observation Nd² s. v. pucchā; DhsA.55. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsandati: {'def': '(saṁ+sand+a), 适合，同意，一起跑。【过】saṁsandi。【过分】saṁsandita。【独】saṁsanditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+syand, cp. BSk. saṁsyandati AvŚ II.142 sq., 188] to run together, to associate D.I,248; II,223; S.II,158=It.70; S.IV,379; Pug.32. -- Caus. saṁsandeti to put together; unite, combine J.I,403; V,216; Miln.131; DhA.II,12; IV,51. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsandeti: {'def': '(saṁsandati的【使】), 使适宜，比较。【过】saṁsandesi。【独】saṁsandetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsanna: {'def': '[pp. of saṁsīdati or saṁsandati] depressed, exhausted Dh.280 (=osanna DhA.III,410: see ossanna). (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsappa: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁ+sṛp] creeping A.V,289. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsappana: {'def': '【中】扭动，挣扎。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsappaniyapariyāya: {'def': 'the creeping exposition, a discussion of the consequences of certain kinds of kamma, A.V,288 sq. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsappati: {'def': '(saṁ++sap服务+a), 向前爬，爬行，慢慢地移动。【过】saṁsappi。【独】saṁsapitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+sappati] to creep along, to crawl, move A.V,289; VvA.278; DhA.IV,49. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsappin: {'def': '(adj.)=saṁsappa A.IV,172. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsarati: {'def': '[saṁ+sarati, of sṛ] to move about continuously, to come again and again J.I,335. -- 2. to go through one life after the other, to transmigrate D.I,14; DA.I,105; ppr. saṁsaranto (& saṁsaraṁ) S.III,149; IV,439; It.109; PvA.166; med. saṁsaramāna Vv 19⁷; ger. °saritvā S.III,212; Pug.16. -- pp. saṁsarita & saṁsita. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+sar(梵sr)动转+a), 不断地到处移动，轮回。【过】saṁsari。【过分】saṁsarita。【独】saṁsaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsaraṇa: {'def': '【中】到处移动，徘徊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+sṛ] 1. moving about, running; °lohita blood in circulation (opp. sannicita°) Vism.261; KhA 62; VbhA.245. -- 2. a movable curtain, a blind that can be drawn aside Vin.II,153. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsarita: {'def': '[pp. of saṁsarati] transmigrated D.II,90; A.II,1; Th.2, 496. a° M.I,82. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsati: {'def': '[Vedic śaṁsati, cp. Av. saṁhaiti to proclaim, Lat. censeo=censure; Obulg. qom to say] to proclaim, point out J.V,77; VI,533; Pot. saṁse J.VI,181; aor. asaṁsi J.III,420; IV,395; V,66; & asāsī (Sk. aśaṁsīt) J.III,484. Cp. abhi°. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsatta: {'def': '【过分】已附著，已执著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of saṁ+sañj] adhering, clinging D.I,239 (paramparā°). (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsava: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+sru] flowing VvA.227. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsavaka: {'def': '[fr. saṁsava] N. of a purgatory Vv 52¹², cp. VvA.226 sq. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsaveti: {'def': 'Saṁsāveti [fr. saṁ+sru] to cause to flow together, to pour into (Loc.), to put in J.V,268 (=pakkhipati C.). (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsaya: {'def': '[cp. Vedic saṁśaya] doubt A.II,24; Nd² 660 (=vicikicchā etc.); Miln.94; Dhs.425. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic saṁwaya) ,【阳】疑惑、忧虑(doubt(=vicikicchā))。aññamaññaṁ mukhāni oloketvā saṁsayapakkhandehi,, 面面相觑后，陷入疑惑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsayita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of saṁsayati=saṁ+seti of śi; in meaning=saṁsaya] doubt Dāvs.I,50. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsaṭṭha: {'def': '(pp. of saṁ+srj发出),【过分】已和…混合，已参加，已结交。S.22.3./III,11.︰Idha, gahapati, ekacco gihīhi saṁsaṭṭho viharati sahanandī sahasokī, sukhitesu sukhito, dukkhitesu dukkhito, uppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu attanā tesu yogaṁ āpajjati.(居士！在此，有一类(出家)人与在家混杂居住，同喜，同愁，於乐中乐，於苦中苦，於生起作当作的事，自己陷入其中。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of saṁ+sṛj] 1. mixed with (Instr.), associating with, joined M.I,480 (opp. vi°); A.III,109, 116, 258 sq., 393; PvA.47. -- 2. living in society Vin.I,200; II,4; IV,239, 294; D.II,214; Kvu 337=DhsA.42; Dhs.1193; J.II,105; DhsA.49, 72. --a° not given to society M.I,214; S.I,63; Miln.244; Vism.73. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁseda: {'def': '(saṁ+seda) (cp.BSk saṁsvedaja)汗，湿。saṁsedaja﹐湿生(有情类生从湿气出生)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+seda] sweat, moisture M.I,73; ThA.185.

--ja [cp. BSk saṁsvedaja Divy 627] born or arisen from moisture D.III,230; Miln.128; KhA 247; VbhA.161. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsedaja: {'def': '【形】湿生的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁseva: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁ+sev] associating A.II,245; V,113 sq. (sappurisa° & asappurisa°); Miln.93. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】saṁsevanā,【阴】结交。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsevanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁsevati] associating Dhs.1326=Pug.20. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsevati: {'def': '(saṁ+ sev服侍、联合+a), 结交(台语：交陪kau pue5)，参加。【过】saṁsevi。【过分】saṁvita。【现分】saṁsevamāna。【独】saṁsevitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsevin: {'def': '(adj.)=saṁseva J.I,488. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsevita: {'def': '[saṁ+sevita] frequented, inhabited J.VI,539. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsevā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁseva] worshipping, attending Miln.93 (sneha°). (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsevī: {'def': '【形】结交的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsibbita: {'def': '(saṁsibbati 的【过分】), 已缝纫，已交织。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of saṁ+sibbati] entwined Vism.1; Miln.102, 148; DhA.III,198. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsiddhi: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+siddhi] success Dhtp 420. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】成功。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsijjhati: {'def': '(saṁ+siddh+ya), 被实现，成功,【过】saṁsijjhi。【过分】saṁsiddha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+sidh] to be fulfilled Sdhp.451. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsita: {'def': '(saṁsati 的【过分】), 已期望，已盼望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ =saṁsarita J.V,56 (cira-ratta°=carita anuciṇṇa C.). (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of saṁ+śri] dependent Sdhp.306. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁskrta: {'def': '【梵语】梵语(原意︰整理好的)。梵语似乎是人工组成的语言。唐玄奘《大唐西域记》卷二说︰「详其文字﹐梵天所制﹐原始垂则﹐四十七言(47个字母)。」梵语这个名词﹐可能就代表印度语言学者早有的想法。不过﹐梵语一词在中国并不是一开始就有的﹐《梁高僧传》卷一《安清传》说︰「於是宣译众经﹐改胡为汉。」「胡」字在同书的元﹑明本作“梵”﹐用“梵”代替“胡”﹐表示中国学者对梵语有了进一步认识。梵语元音分简单元音﹑二合元音﹑三合元音﹐辅音分喉音﹑腭音﹑顶音﹑齿音﹑唇音﹑半元音﹑噝音和气音等。%b\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0 名词有性(阳性﹑阴性﹑中性)﹑数(单数﹑双数﹑复数)﹑格(体格﹑业格﹑具格﹑为格﹑从格﹑属格﹑依格﹑呼格)的变化。%b\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0\xa0 动词变位包括单数﹑双数﹑复数﹔人称有第一﹑第二﹑第三人称﹔时间分现在时﹑未完成时﹑完成时﹑不定过去时﹑将来时﹑假定时﹔语态有主动﹑中间﹑被动﹔语气分陈述式﹑虚拟式﹑命令式﹑祈使式(不定过去时的虚拟语气)﹔语尾分原始和派生两种。义净在《梵语千字文》的序言中说:“并是当途要字﹐但学得此﹐则余语皆通﹐不同旧千字文﹐若兼悉昙章读梵本﹐一两年间即堪翻译矣﹐”但是﹐这是难以做到的﹐其后还有一些书﹐如《翻梵语》﹑《翻译名义集》等﹐也只是单词对译一类的书﹐从《高僧传》中可以看出﹐唐代一些佛教寺庙教授梵语﹐至於用什么课本﹐怎样教﹐我们都不清楚。(录自︰http://db2.library.ntpu.edu.tw/cpedia/Content.asp?ID=50018) 现代印度语为印地语，印地语标准语有母音11个\xa0\xa0，辅音43个。54个音位中，有1个母音和5个辅音是外来音，只使用於外来语中。印地语原有的10个母音都有对应的鼻化形式。辅音中不但清塞音、清塞擦音等有对应的送气音，浊塞音、浊塞擦音、闪音等也都有对应的送气音。送气音和不送气音有区别意义的作用。一般没有重音，也没有声调。语法比梵语大大简化，名词有阴性、阳性和单数、复数的范畴。在少数代词中还保留了格的残余形式。名词格的形式已经消失。句中名词或代词跟其他词之间的关系是在名词或代词后面用后置词来表示。名词或代词等带有后置词时，其形式有一定的变化。动词除有人称、性、数等范畴外，还有体、时、式、态等范畴。句子的基本语序为主语—宾语—谓语。辞汇方面，基本词汇大部分是从梵语演变而来的。各专业学科的术语，近来的趋向是直接取自梵语，或用梵语构词法创立新的梵语词。在穆斯林统治时期，印地语吸收了大量波斯语和阿拉伯语词。英国统治时期，它又吸收了大量英语词语，至今还在不断地从英语吸收新的词语。在吸收外来语同时，还吸收了外来语的一些构词手段。(http://baike.baidu.com/view/65810.htm)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsuddha: {'def': '【过分】已纯粹。saṁsuddhagahaṇika,【形】纯净的血统。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+suddha] pure D.I,113; Sn.372, 1107; Nd¹ 289; Nd² 661; J.I,2.

--gahaṇika of pure descent D.I,113; DA.I,281. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsuddhi: {'def': '【阴】纯净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+suddhi) purification Sn.788; Nd¹ 84. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsumbhati: {'def': '[saṁ+sumbhati] to beat J.VI,53, 88 (°amāna). (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsādeti: {'def': 'Caus. of saṁsīdati (q. v.). (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+sad坐+e), 置在一边，搁置，延期。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsādiyā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. *Sk. syavaṁ-sātikā, on which see Kern, Toev. II.62, s. v.] a kind of inferior rice J.VI,530. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsāmeti: {'def': '[Caus. of saṁ+śam] lit. “to smoothe,” to fold up (one’s sleeping mat), to leave (one’s bed), in phrase senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā Vin.II,185; IV,24; M.I,457; S.III,95, 133; IV,288. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsāra: {'def': '[fr. saṁsarati] 1. transmigration, lit. faring on D.I,54; II,206 (here=existence); M.I,81 (saṁsārena suddhi); S.II,178 sq.; A.I,10; II,12=52; Sn.517; Dh.60; J.I,115; Pv.II,13¹¹; Vism.544 (in detail), 578, 603 (°assa kāraka); PvA.63, 243. For description of saṁsāra (its endlessness & inevitableness) see e. g. S.II,178, 184 sq., 263; III,149 sq.; VbhA.134 (anta-virahita) & anamatagga (to which add refs. VbhA.45, 182, 259, 260). -- 2. moving on, circulation: vacī° exchange of words A.I,79.

--cakka [cp. BSk. saṁsāra-cakra] the wheel of tr. Vism.198, 201; VvA.105=PvA.7. --dukkha the ill of tr. Vism.531; VbhA.145, 149. --bhaya fear of tr. VbhA.199. --sāgara the ocean of tr. J.III,241. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '轮回;流转', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(saṁ+sar(梵sr)动转),【阳】继续旅行，轮回。saṁsāracakka,【中】轮回的轮子。saṁsāradukkha,【中】轮回的苦。saṁsārasāgara,【阳】轮回的大海。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsāyati: {'def': '[saṁ+sāyati, which stands for sādati (of svad to sweeten). On y›d cp. khāyita›khādita & saṅkhāyita] to taste, enjoy J.III,201 (aor. samasāyisuṁ: so read for samāsāsisuṁ). (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsīda: {'def': '[fr. saṁsīdati] sinking (down) S.IV,180 (v. l. saṁsāda). (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsīdana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁsīdati]=saṁsīda Th.1, 572 (ogha°). (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】沉没。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsīdati: {'def': '[saṁ+sad] 1. to sink down, to lose heart D.I,248; A.III,89=Pug.65; Th.1, 681; J.II,330. -- 2. to be at an end (said of a path, magga) Vin.III,131; S.I,1. -- Caus. saṁsādeti: 1. to get tired, give out M.I,214; A.I,288. ‹-› 2. to drop, fail in A.IV,398 (pañhaṁ, i. e. not answer). -- 3. to place DA.I,49. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+sad坐+a), 下沉，灰心，消极，变弱。【过】saṁsīdi。【现分】saṁsīdamāna。【独】saṁsīditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsīna: {'def': '【过分】已下跌。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+sīna, pp. of śṛ to crush, Sk. śīrṇa] fallen off, destroyed Sn.44 (°patta without leaves=patita-patta C.). (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁsūcaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁsūceti] indicating VvA.244, 302. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】指出的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁsūceti: {'def': '[saṁ+sūcay°, denom. fr. sūci] to indicate, show, betray Dāvs.V,50; DA.I,311. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁusanatā: {'def': '﹐【形】失忆性，失念。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvacana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+vacana] sentence DhsA.52. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+vacana) ,【中】句子(sentence DhsA.52.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvacchara: {'def': '[saṁ+vacchara; cp. Vedic saṁvatsara] a year D.II,327; A.II,75; IV,139, 252 sq.; Dh.108; J.II,80; Sdhp.239; Nom. pl. saṁvaccharāni J.II,128. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+vacchara; cp. Vedic saṁvatsara),【中】年(a year)。Nom. pl. saṁvaccharāni J.II,128.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvadana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁvadati] a certain magic act performed in order to procure harmony D.I,11; DA.I,96; cp. Dial. I.23. (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvadati: {'def': '[saṁ+vadati] to agree M.I,500 (opp. vivadati). (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvaddha: {'def': '【过分】已长大，已培养。参考 Saṁvaḍḍha。saṁvaddhana,【中】生长，培养，成长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaddhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+vṛdh] increasing, causing to grow J.IV,16. (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvara: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+vṛ] restraint D.I,57, 70, 89; II,281 (indriya°); III,130, 225; A.II,26; S.IV,189 sq.; It.28, 96, 118; Pug.59; Sn.1034; Vin.II,126, 192 (āyatiṁ saṁvarāya “for restraint in the future,” in confession formula), Dh.185; Nett 192; Vism.11, 44; DhA.III,238; IV,86 (°dvārāni). The fivefold saṁvara: sīla°, sati°, ñāṇa°, khanti°, viriya°, i. e. by virtue, mindfulness, insight, patience, effort DhsA.351; as pātimokkha° etc. at Vism.7; VbhA.330 sq. --°vinaya norm of self-control, good conduct SnA 8. cātuyāma°, Jain discipline M L.377. (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】抑制。saṁvaraṇa,【中】限制，障碍，关闭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvarati: {'def': '(saṁ+var遮盖+a),覆盖，关闭，抑制。【过】saṁvari。【过分】saṁvuta。【独】saṁvaritvā。guttadvāro susaṁvuto, 守护(根)门，善自关闭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+varati=vuṇāti 1] to restrain, hold; to restrain oneself Vin.II,102 (Pot. °vareyyāsi); Miln.152 (pāso na saṁvarati). -- pp. saṁvuta. (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvaraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+vṛ] covering; obstruction Dhtp 274 (as def. of root val, i. e. vṛ). (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvarī: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic śarvarī fr. śarvara speckled; the P. form viâ sabbarī›sāvarī›saṁvarī] the night (poetical) D.III,196; J.IV,441; V,14, 269; VI,243. (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】夜晚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvasati: {'def': '[saṁ+vasati²] to live, to associate, cohabitate A.II,57; Vin.II,237; Nd² 423; Pug.65; Dh.167; Dpvs X.8; Miln.250. -- Caus. °vāseti same meaning Vin.IV,137. -- Cp. upa°. (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+vas住+a), 交往，共处，同居。【过】saṁvasi。【过分】saṁvasita。【独】saṁvasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvattanika: {'def': '【形】有益的，涉及的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁvattati] conducive to, involving A.II,54, 65; It.82; Kvu 618; J.I,275; Nett 134=S.V,371. As °iya at PvA.205. (Page 657)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvattati: {'def': '(saṁ+vat+a), 存在，导致(to lead (to), to be useful (for))。【过】saṁvatti。【过分】saṁvattita。Pot. saṁvatteyya。nibbidāya, virāgāya…nibbānāya saṁvattati. e. g. D.I,189; II,251; III,130; S.V,80, 255; A III,83, 326.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+vattati] to lead (to), to be useful (for) A.I,54, 58 (ahitāya dukkhāya); Vin.I,10=S.V,421; It.71 sq.; J.I,97; Pot. saṁvatteyya Vin.I,13. -- Often in phrase nibbidāya, virāgāya . . . nibbānāya saṁvattati e. g. D.I,189; II,251; III,130; S.V,80, 255; A.III,83, 326. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvatteti: {'def': '(saṁvattati 的【使】), 使继续。【过】saṁvattesi。【过分】saṁvattita。【独】saṁvattetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaḍḍha: {'def': '[pp. of saṁvaḍḍhati] grown up, brought up D.I,75; II,38; PvA.66. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Saṁvaḍḍhati的【过分】), 已长大，已培养。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaḍḍhati: {'def': '[saṁ+vaḍḍhati] to grow up; ppr. °amāna (ddh.) growing up, subsisting J.I,189 (so far °vaṭṭ°). ‹-› Caus. °vaḍḍheti to rear, nourish, bring up J.I,231 (ppr. pass. °vaḍḍhiyamāna). (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+vaḍḍh增长+a), 生长，增加。【过】saṁvaḍḍhi。【现分】saṁvaḍḍhamāna。【独】saṁvaḍḍhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaḍḍheti: {'def': '(Saṁvaḍḍhati的【使】), 养育，滋养，培养。【过】saṁvaḍḍhesi。【过分】saṁvaḍḍhita。【独】saṁvaḍḍhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaḍḍhita: {'def': '(Saṁvaḍḍhati的【过分】), 已增加，已长大，已养育。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaṇṇana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+vaṇṇana] praising, praise J.I,234. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvaṇṇeti: {'def': '[saṁ+vaṇṇeti] to praise Vin.III,73 sq.; J.V,292 (aor. 3^rd pl. °vaṇṇayuṁ). Cp. BSk. saṁvarṇayati Divy 115. -- pp. saṁvaṇṇita. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ一起+vaṇṇ称赞+e), 说明，批评，盛赞(赞美有加)。【过】saṁvaṇṇesi。【过分】saṁvaṇṇita。【义】saṁvaṇṇetabba。【独】saṁvaṇṇetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaṇṇita: {'def': '[pp. of saṁvaṇṇeti] praised, comb^d with sambhāvita honoured M.I,110; III,194, 223. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvaṇṇā: {'def': '【阴】说明，解释，赞美。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaṭṭa: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [saṁ+vaṭṭa¹] 1. “rolling on or forward” (opp. vivaṭṭa “rolling back”), with ref. to the development of the Universe & time (kappa) the ascending aeon (vivaṭṭa the descending cycle), evolution It.99; Pug.60; Vism.419; Sdhp.484, 485. --°vivaṭṭa a period within which evolution & dissolution of the world takes place, a complete world-cycle (see also vivaṭṭa) D.I,14; A.II,142; It.15, 99; Pug.60. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvaṭṭakappa: {'def': '【阳】世界的毁灭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaṭṭana: {'def': '【中】旋转，解散。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvaṭṭanika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁvaṭṭa(na)] turning to, being reborn D.I,17. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvaṭṭati: {'def': '(saṁ+vat(vrt)使转动+a), 1.导致，引生(to be evolved, to be in a process of evolution)。2.毁灭(to fall to pieces, to come to an end, to pass away, perish, dissolve)。【过】saṁvaṭṭi。A.1.1./I,3.︰Nāhaṁ bhikkhave, aññaṁ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi yena anuppanno vā kāmacchando uppajjati uppanno vā kāmacchando bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya saṁvattati. (我不见其他一法，如此(一法)能使未生欲贪生起欲贪，或已生欲贪增长扩大。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+vaṭṭati] 1. to be evolved, to be in a process of evolution (opp. vivaṭṭati in devolution) D.I,17; III,84, 109; A.II,142; DA.I,110. -- 2. to fall to pieces, to come to an end (like the world’s destruction), to pass away, perish, dissolve (intrs.) J.III,75 (paṭhavī s.; v. l. saṁvaddh°); Miln.287 (ākāso °eyya). For saṁvaṭṭ° at J.I,189 read saṁvaddh°. (Page 656)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvedhita: {'def': '[saṁ+vyathita: see vyadhati] shaken up, confused, trembling Sn.902. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvega: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+vij] agitation, fear, anxiety; thrill, religious emotion (caused by contemplation of the miseries of this world) D.III,214; A.I,43; II,33, 114; S.I,197; III,85; V,130, 133; It.30; Sn.935; J.I,138; Nd¹ 406; Vism.135=KhA 235 (eight objects inducing emotion: birth, old age, illness, death, misery in the apāyas, and the misery caused by saṁsāra in past, present & future stages); Mhvs 1, 4; 23, 62; PvA.1, 22, 32, 39, 76. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】悚惧，激动，宗教性的情绪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvejana: {'def': '【中】情绪的因素，激动的因素。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁ+vij] agitating, moving It.30. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvejaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saṁvejana] apt to cause emotion A.II,120; Vism.238. See also saṁvijjati¹. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】易於引起情绪的，易於引起焦虑的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saṁvejeti: {'def': '(saṁ+vij+e), 使激励，使激动。【过】saṁvejesi。【过分】saṁvejita。【独】saṁvejetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Caus. of saṁvijjati¹ (q. v.). (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvejita: {'def': '[pp. of saṁvejeti] stirred, moved, agitated S.I,197; Nd¹ 406. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saṁvelleti: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+vell] to gather up, bundle together, fold up Vism.327. (Page 658)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】